summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/79051-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '79051-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--79051-0.txt7839
1 files changed, 7839 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/79051-0.txt b/79051-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b88012d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/79051-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7839 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 79051 ***
+
+
+
+
+ ATALANTA
+
+
+
+
+ ATALANTA
+ OR
+ TWELVE MONTHS IN THE
+ EVENING STAR
+
+
+ BY
+ CHARLES NAPIER RICHARDS
+
+
+ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
+
+
+ BRIGHTON
+ H. & C. TREACHER, 1 NORTH STREET
+ LONDON
+ SIMPKIN MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT, & CO., LTD.
+ STATIONERS HALL COURT, E.C.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+ CHAPTER PAGE
+
+ I. THE GATHERING OF THE FRIENDS 7
+
+ II. A LIFE SORROW AND ITS REMEDY 13
+
+ III. STARTING SKYWARDS 17
+
+ IV. THE LUNAR PERIL 26
+
+ V. THE METEORIC STORM 33
+
+ VI. INTO THE BLACK GULF 40
+
+ VII. THE NORTHERN ISLAND 48
+
+ VIII. FIRST EXPLORATIONS 54
+
+ IX. ACROSS THE CENTRAL OCEAN 60
+
+ X. WHEN THE RAIN MIST LIFTED 67
+
+ XI. THE CITY AND ITS WELCOME 77
+
+ XII. NEEDFUL PREPARATIONS 89
+
+ XIII. THE FIRST ORDEAL 98
+
+ XIV. THE SECOND ORDEAL 109
+
+ XV. A TALE AT A SUPPER PARTY 120
+
+ XVI. MALCHON’S GOSPEL 130
+
+ XVII. THE PERILS OF CROSS CURRENTS 139
+
+ XVIII. THE FESTIVAL OF PANACLA 147
+
+ XIX. AN AERIAL VOYAGE WITH DIVERS EXPERIENCES 156
+
+ XX. THE ISLAND OF TWILIGHT 167
+
+ XXI. THE PEAK OF APTAURA 173
+
+ XXII. THE GREAT MYSTERY 177
+
+ XXIII. LYDON’S REVOLT 187
+
+ XXIV. THE DENUNCIATION AND THE RETRIBUTION 198
+
+ XXV. THE OLD LOVE AND THE NEW 211
+
+ XXVI. THE FAREWELL OF AMALONA 221
+
+ XXVII. THE SACRED MANUSCRIPT AND THE PRICE PAID FOR IT 228
+
+ XXVIII. THE MESSAGE FROM THE OBSERVATORY 241
+
+ XXIX. THE FEAST OF FAREWELL 253
+
+ XXX. THE MYSTERY THAT WAS UNSOLVED 267
+
+
+
+
+ ATALANTA
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER I
+
+ THE GATHERING OF THE FRIENDS
+
+
+“I say, you fellows, can any of you oblige by throwing an illuminating
+light on the movements of old Carmichael?”
+
+The question was addressed by Maurice Sheldon to a party of
+undergraduates assembled in his college rooms in Cambridge, one lazy
+afternoon near the end of the summer term.
+
+“Well,” said Gilbert Rice, after some moments of acute reflection, “the
+dear old owl has taken advantage of the close of his lecture course
+to take himself off to some unknown hole in Northumberland called
+‘Newbiggin-on-the-Sea,’ I believe.”
+
+“Anxious to turn over a new leaf and make a new beginning,” ejaculated
+Joe Vallance.
+
+“Why on earth did he stop there and not go on to Edinburgh or to the
+Highlands like any sensible man?” queried Sheldon.
+
+“I was dangerously near suggesting that he wasn’t one, but I see
+Abercromby getting ready a missile to shy at my head,” answered Gilbert
+Rice, “but I don’t mind saying Carmichael is an awfully decent sort
+when you really get to know him.”
+
+“Well, I _have_ got to know him,” retorted Frank Abercromby, with
+emphasis, “and I tell you this, he is working body and soul at
+something that will astonish the world when the secret is out.”
+
+“Stagger humanity like old Kruger,” said the teasing Vallance. “Put
+some whisky into his coffee, and he will tell us all about it.”
+
+“I shan’t tell you anything till Carmichael gives the word. He has
+gone up to that quiet spot to meet Carysfort the engineer whom some of
+you know, and also Clarence Radcliffe the Oxford curate. The last is a
+queer sort of a chap, rather a dreamer you know, been through an awful
+lot of trouble, lost his wife during their honeymoon, but he did me
+a regular good turn and I mean to stick to him. I’m going to ask him
+to come and meet the Professor and the engineer and we will see if we
+can’t get a bit ahead.”
+
+“But, my dear chap, how long is this job going to take?” said Sheldon.
+“Carysfort is a pledge there will be _one_ sane person in the
+enterprise, but how are you to start again for your degree?”
+
+“I’m not going to start again.”
+
+“Great Scott! are you going down after this term?”
+
+“I’ve no alternative. My uncle hates me, and has taken an unjust
+advantage of my failing to pass to give up all further support of me.”
+
+“I’m awfully sorry, but what the dickens will you do?”
+
+“Join myself to Carysfort and the Professor.”
+
+“And what will _he_ do?” slyly put in Gilbert Rice.
+
+“Well, of all the extraordinary things I ever heard, this about beats
+the record,” said Sheldon. Then he resumed--
+
+“Carmichael the scientific don, whose lectures were so dry that they
+well-nigh killed the Vice-Chancellor. Carysfort a hard-headed engineer,
+Radcliffe a poor parson nearly knocked silly by melodrama in his
+honeymoon, and you Abercromby--well, present company always excepted
+you know--meeting to carry on some work in Northumbria about which our
+distinguished selves are for an indefinite time to know nothing,” and
+he finished with the most expressive of gestures.
+
+“I think we had better go a walk to Cherry Hinton,” said Joe Vallance;
+“won’t you come with us, Abercromby?”
+
+“No, comrades of a bygone day,” said Abercromby, with a distinct catch
+in his voice, “I have a less pleasurable duty to do: to pack my box.”
+
+“Well, I’m beastly sorry,” said Gilbert Rice, “hope the clouds will
+roll by soon, old fellow.”
+
+ * * * * *
+
+A few weeks later a small group of friends were seated in the parlour
+of a house in a lonely situation facing the North Sea, a few hundred
+yards from St. Bartholomew’s Point at Newbiggin. The July sun was
+setting in splendour and the watery expanse was calm as a lake. The
+Professor had placed upon the table a small model, shaped after the
+fashion of a submarine boat constructed of a greyish-white substance,
+divided into several tiny compartments and pointed at the end with a
+steel prow.
+
+“Gentlemen,” said the Professor, “I will ask my good friend Mr.
+Carysfort to explain to you in outline the significance of what you now
+see.”
+
+“Well, gentlemen,” answered the engineer, “this is only a small model,
+but the first step is often the most important, and it will certainly
+be so, we trust, in this case. This machine is capable of doing more
+than solving the problem of aerial navigation. It is an airship and
+can be used as such by the action of the revolving fans, but it can
+do more. When there is no air sufficient for the fans to beat, it can
+still go onward farther and farther from the earth. You know that in
+theory any particle of attraction can be converted into a particle
+of repulsion whereby the law of gravitation may be suspended for an
+adequate time. But the practical difficulty has been to find a power
+that will effect this change. The power has been found. A new substance
+has been discovered by the joint labour of the Professor and myself,
+two new chemical elements both having certain affinities with radium,
+which can, by the help of electric energy, impart to this model, or to
+a machine of larger size, the power to resist the gravitation force
+of the earth until we are sufficiently far away from it to fall into
+some other centre of attraction. This simply means that the secret of
+interplanetary communication has been solved.”
+
+The others listened in profound silence. Then Clarence Radcliffe said:
+“How long will it take to construct a machine on the requisite scale
+and finish?”
+
+“About two years at the most,” answered Carysfort, “but I hope a less
+time will suffice.”
+
+“And where the dickens are we going?” asked Abercromby. “To the moon,
+I suppose, first, and then onwards to Mars. Mars seems to be the goal
+of scientific enterprise just now.”
+
+“I shall not go to Mars,” replied the Professor; “we know as much about
+Mars already as we can ever hope to know without actually visiting
+it. People rave about the canals, but that semi-arctic planet, which
+I do not believe is inhabited after all, has little interest for me.
+But there is a planet equal in size to our own earth, much nearer to
+us than Mars, aglow with light and probably with life. We are going
+to Venus. This is the enterprise which will enrich humanity with the
+larger knowledge. You can get a map of Mars with all the continents
+named, but no one ever drew a map of Venus. No one ever will except he
+goes there.”
+
+“What is to be approximately the speed of the machine?” said Radcliffe.
+
+“Ten miles a second when we are in the airless void,” replied
+Carysfort, “but we can regulate our speed at will when it becomes
+advisable to do so. The distance to be travelled is between
+twenty-three and twenty-seven millions, according to the precise
+positions of the two planets. Mars is never less than thirty-five
+millions and that only once in about fifteen years; its ordinary
+minimum of nearness is at least forty-eight millions.”
+
+“How many people will the machine be constructed to hold?” said
+Abercromby in a rather excited tone.
+
+The Professor hesitated, then he slowly replied, “For myself, my
+servant Jackson, Carysfort, and one other.” There was a moment’s
+pause, then the Professor looked fixedly at Abercromby.
+
+“May I take a turn with you on the sands?” asked Abercromby, his face
+somewhat flushed.
+
+The Professor assented, leaving Radcliffe talking with the engineer.
+The two others opened the garden gate and stepped out on to the fine
+dry sands for which Newbiggin is famous.
+
+“Come, my friend,” said the Professor, “you must not take refuge in
+shyness, but to end all dispute, I want _you_. You have had rough luck,
+and you are just the young fellow whose services an older man like me
+would gladly enlist.”
+
+“Professor,” said Abercromby, “I am awfully keen on the work, few could
+be more so, but I will give up my share to the man who saved me from a
+beastly scrape when I was visiting Oxford.”
+
+“I know to what you refer,” replied Carmichael a little impatiently;
+“some rascal accused you of stealing one of the inter-Varsity athletic
+prizes, and Radcliffe cleared you by unmasking the real culprit. No one
+rejoiced more than I, but I cannot see why this should cut you out of
+the greatest enterprise ever attempted by man.”
+
+“Have you heard of Radcliffe’s awful trial?”
+
+“Not full particulars.”
+
+“Well, I will tell you all I know, and then you will see that the only
+chance of saving him from utter shipwreck lies in giving him a new
+object in life.”
+
+“Will the story take long in the telling?”
+
+“Ten minutes.”
+
+“Drive ahead then.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER II
+
+ A LIFE SORROW AND ITS REMEDY
+
+
+“I’m not going to pile on the agony, but will just give you the main
+facts.
+
+“He was curate at one of the Oxford churches, after taking a good
+degree in his special department. Well, he cycles over to Chipping
+Norton in the summer term, rescues a lady from the grip of a loafing
+tramp, gets invited to the house, a country rectory a mile or so from
+the town. She thinks him a paladin, of course; he thinks her an angel
+equally of course. They get head over ears; the old parson hesitates
+at first but consents. So he is married in the village church to May
+Lilian Carnforth. I do soberly believe that no two human beings ever so
+loved each other since marriage was instituted.”
+
+“Five minutes gone,” said the Professor dryly.
+
+“They went on their honeymoon to Barmouth. They had not been there long
+before she began to lose her admiration of him, though he kept his
+admiration of her. At last they had a row; I don’t know what it was
+about, some utterly trivial matter probably. She declared she would
+not go an excursion up the river to Dolgelly with him as had been
+planned. He said in anger she might go by herself, knowing that this
+was practically impossible. She flounced out of the house and went
+across the road to her cousin, Miss Amy Vereker, who was staying in
+the place. Radcliffe saw them go off together. Miss Vereker was expert
+at the oar. He thought it best to let them go by themselves. It was an
+ideal day for a river or sea trip. He waved his hand to his wife as she
+turned the corner, but she gave no response. To cut the ghastly story
+short, the boat was upset near Penmaen Pool. Amy Vereker just narrowly
+saved her life, May Lilian Radcliffe was drowned. No one will ever know
+exactly what happened; it was held at the inquest that the boat grated
+upon a rock in mid-stream. Radcliffe came home alone, and resumed his
+work. He is said to have preached better, but I only heard him once.
+His subject was ‘The Wilderness,’ and though I am a graceless scamp,
+and likely to remain so, I had a jolly old cry when I came out.”
+
+The Professor stood silent. At last he said, “We will go back to the
+house; I will speak to Radcliffe.”
+
+The party were still assembled in the parlour inspecting and admiring
+the model machine. Honest Tom Jackson, who had been the Professor’s
+faithful servant for years, was just saying, “It looks so nice that
+it’s a pity we can’t get into it and start at once. It’s a deal of
+polishing I’ll be after when I gets into the real one. I’ll keep it as
+bright as a new pin.”
+
+“Mr. Radcliffe,” said the Professor, “I shall be pleased to offer you
+a place in our expedition. You will be a most welcome addition to our
+party if you choose to cast in your lot with us.”
+
+“I have often wished to die,” said Radcliffe, whose eyes shone with
+a strange lustre, “but you have offered me something nobler. But I
+am a minister and I do not know how far my beliefs may be in accord
+with yours. I am also a man crushed to the very ground with a sorrow
+that nothing can ever eradicate but the Mansions of the Blest, which
+even the ancient Egyptians believed in, and to which I wish to go some
+day for a special purpose. Ought such a man as I to travel with those
+whose energies are fresh and unimpaired? But if we ever reach Venus
+and find intelligent life upon its surface you must give me a free
+hand, provided I do not compromise your safety. I place myself at your
+disposal, gentlemen.”
+
+“My dear chap, just come along and see what there is to be seen,” said
+Abercromby cheerfully. “I shall often think of you, and hope that the
+bigger sun of Venus may shine upon your dream and your work. Don’t go
+on to Mercury, mind!”
+
+The whole party laughed, but upon the face of Radcliffe there was a
+grave and troubled look of enquiry. “You are coming of course,” he said.
+
+“No room--given up my berth in the asteroid to you, old fellow.”
+
+“Then I decline,” said Radcliffe promptly.
+
+“Beg pardon, gentlemen,” broke in Jackson, “but why couldn’t we put on
+an extra bit to the machine, and have the two? One will dance to the
+natives up there, and the tother will preach to ’em.”
+
+“I shall do it,” said the Professor; “it will cost very little more.
+They shall both go. As to the matter of beliefs, I don’t choose to let
+every bystander know my mind. Mr. Radcliffe’s may be old-fashioned, but
+they have contrived to carry him through what might have wrecked other
+men. A new world will probably put a number of things on a sounder
+footing, though it may knock others on the head. Carysfort and myself
+have not studied theology, we are simply thinkers with open minds.
+If there are any people in Venus to teach, teach them all you can,
+and learn from them all you can. You are a scholar and a philosophic
+dreamer as well as being an old-fashioned believer. I knew a parson
+very like yourself, he was the straitest of the strait, but when I
+got him out of the pulpit for a little private talk, I never met so
+daring a speculatist in my life. But he kept his speculations as
+speculations, and he gave his people only his convictions. But I am
+on the sermonising warpath myself, and will pull up. You are welcome
+amongst us, and are now one of us.”
+
+“I’m a man of few words,” said the engineer, “but I’m right glad to
+have both you and Mr. Abercromby. We could not afford to dispense with
+either of you.”
+
+“From the depths of my grateful heart I thank you,” said Radcliffe in a
+broken voice.
+
+“Well, it is about time we had some tea,” suggested Abercromby; “all
+the rest of the business is settled _nem. con._ I always find it safe
+to abbreviate _my_ Latin.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER III
+
+ STARTING SKYWARDS
+
+
+Two years have passed away since the meeting at Newbiggin described in
+the last chapter. They have been years of varied and incessant toil,
+research, forethought, and preparation.
+
+The Professor continued his scientific lectures in Cambridge for one
+more academic year and took a house for the vacation at Cullercoats.
+Carysfort stuck to his old quarters near to Newbiggin, where his
+workshops were erected. Abercromby kept with him, working like a dock
+labourer, as the engineer used often to say. Radcliffe held on to
+his curacy at Oxford and drew crowds, at least so Abercromby always
+declared, for when he could spare himself a holiday he ran down to
+see him. His rector, a man notorious for his orthodoxy though his
+sympathies ran in a somewhat different channel, would have been much
+startled had he known the character of the studies in which his curate
+delighted.
+
+Many works that bore on astronomy and kindred subjects were to be found
+in his library, and once a person, happening to drop in, casually
+remarked that the undergraduate who had evidently left his books behind
+him when he went down must have been a man of wide reading.
+
+Study is generally supposed to make a man pale and thin, but upon the
+curate it had a contrary effect. He seemed, as time went on, to get
+better and stronger. He sunk the whole of his private means in his
+friends’ enterprise, and supported himself for the last few months on
+the merest pittance.
+
+One bright June evening he and Abercromby met on the railway platform
+at Cullercoats. They walked together to Beverley Terrace and had tea
+and supper with the Professor and Carysfort.
+
+“Matters are approaching a crisis, old man,” said Abercromby. “The
+Professor tells me we must pack our week-end boxes in a month, in fact,
+to be precise, July 22nd is the day fixed.”
+
+A spasm of pain shot across Radcliffe’s face but he only said, “I will
+be ready.”
+
+“Write me down an ass,” said Abercromby. “We must alter the date,
+Professor.”
+
+“Quite so,” answered Carmichael. “Venus is approaching the minimum
+distance, but a margin of ten days could be allowed.”
+
+“There shall not be a margin of ten minutes as far as I am concerned,”
+replied Radcliffe. “After all, it is best for me that I should bid an
+eternal farewell to this earth on that date. It has been chosen for me,
+and I accept it.”
+
+“Let me tell you how matters stand,” said Carysfort. “We had our
+trial trip last night. It was quite dark, there was no moon, so we
+could start unobserved. We passed over Rothbury at a height of about
+two miles, then we drifted towards Newcastle, and when we were over
+Ponteland we soared straight towards the zenith. We saw the sun rise
+in the east, and then found that our most difficult task was to get
+back again before it rose over the Tyne. We were quite outside the
+atmosphere and saw the earth at a rather unusual altitude. It was a bit
+ghastly I allow, but we knew already we had succeeded.”
+
+“Abercromby was splendid,” said the Professor; “he stood in the outer
+balcony in that rarefied atmosphere till I had to drag him in.”
+
+“I drew the line at going off pop,” said Abercromby, “because I
+naturally felt that though I might be of little use at the best of
+times, yet if by chance I burst I might even be less.”
+
+“Did any people see you as you descended?” asked Radcliffe.
+
+“Only two bounders walking in from Woodhorn, and though it was barely
+six o’clock they had both been tippling. They ran down the road
+screaming, but we put on speed and were safe over the garden wall and
+our machine in its proper place before they could do any harm. It was a
+near shave though, and we have voted for no more trips till the final
+start.”
+
+“What I have chiefly feared,” said the Professor, “was that some
+meddling Government official would insist upon knowing what we were
+about. However, being in England, I knew I was in the easiest place
+to destroy the British Empire if I desired so to do, as nobody would
+believe it of me, and everybody would think it uncharitable to say
+it of me, so I had no bother except from the surveyor of taxes. It
+happened that some patriotic gentleman not very far off was perfecting
+an airship to render England invulnerable to the Germans, but many
+liberal-minded clergymen and laymen think he would show a more broad
+spirit of Christianity if he gave it to the Kaiser. Thanks to this good
+man I have been much less an object of curiosity than I might have
+been.”
+
+“Suppose we just take a stroll on the Tynemouth sands and talk over
+details,” said Carysfort. “To-morrow, if you can stay, you must come
+with us to Newbiggin and inspect the machine for yourself. Full
+particulars must wait until then.”
+
+Radcliffe assented with pleasure. They strolled along as far as they
+could, talking and discussing, while a band was playing “All in the
+hush of twilight,” and a negro minstrel performance was going on near
+the Palace Pier. There was a sort of open-air concert, two vocalists
+having sung “Beauty’s home, Killarney,” and “Phil the Fluter’s Ball,”
+sang “Love launched a fairy boat.” The people encored and they sang it
+again. Radcliffe stood listening, and only Frank Abercromby noticed
+that his eyes were full of tears. Carysfort, who voted the whole
+proceedings a deadly nuisance, at last pulled him away, and resumed
+discussions upon mathematics and locomotion.
+
+After supper the party had a further walk along the Cullercoats
+promenade and then retired to rest in readiness for a visit to
+Newbiggin in the early hours of the morning.
+
+The party were gathered in due course before the great steel-grey
+machine with its fans, its balconies, and its long steel prow. They
+mounted the short ladder that gave access to the interior, which
+consisted of an upper-deck dining-room lighted with electricity, with
+large windows, the glass of which was protected by steel shutters
+easily workable and short steel projections. There was a long table in
+the centre with chairs, around the thickly padded walls ran couches and
+divans, and in recesses various collections of books, instruments of
+all kinds, and other articles, each firmly secured to the wall.
+
+Below the dining-room, approached by a hatchway, were small cabins
+with comfortable hammocks, and, below these, the engine-room and the
+store-rooms. At one end of the dining-room a flight of steps with
+protecting hand-rail led to the conning-tower where the upper steering
+apparatus was fixed, communicating with electric bells with the lower
+duplicate steering apparatus in the engine-room. There was direct
+communication by bells and telephones with each several part of the
+machine.
+
+In order that nothing useful might be forgotten, each member, every
+four months, wrote out a list of necessary and desirable things and
+sent them in to the Professor. Twice over the list was carefully
+revised. Abercromby reminded them one day that the only thing he
+could think of was to give a name to the machine, and they decided to
+christen her the “Asteroid.”
+
+ * * * * *
+
+At six o’clock on the evening of July 22nd the whole company was
+assembled in the parlour of the lonely house at Newbiggin. It was a
+close thunderous summer evening, the sea had scarce a ripple, and the
+air was most oppressively still.
+
+Abercromby in vain tried to revive their spirits by his jokes and
+sallies, but a solemn sadness hung over the company, yet combining with
+it an emotion of undaunted resolve.
+
+“Now, friends and comrades,” said the Professor, “I propose in an
+hour’s time that we take final possession of the Asteroid. The work
+of cutting loose from our moorings will, even then, occupy a certain
+while, but I suggest that we start skywards at eight p.m.
+
+“Now it is my duty to say that I offer a final opportunity to any one,
+if he has the least misgivings, to draw back; I shall think none the
+worse of him. We are sensible men, and we must for the last time look
+difficulties in the face ere we are committed beyond recall.”
+
+“There are no difficulties,” retorted Abercromby.
+
+“Pardon me, my dear fellow, but that is nonsense. To begin with, we
+run the risk of our motive force failing us or going wrong, in which
+case we should fall back at ruinous speed upon the earth, and be either
+burned to cinders in its atmosphere or pulverised upon its surface.
+Then we have a struggle to wage against the attractive force of the
+sun, and I need not point out what sort of death will await us that way.
+
+“Supposing we get near to Venus, we have to encounter the fall upon its
+surface, which, with all our care, may be deadly. Once arrived, we may
+find its air unbreathable, and its heat too great for human life. Its
+people may capture us and deprive us of our machine, thus preventing
+us for ever from returning home; and they may even torture us and
+kill us. Then we have the terrors of the return journey, which are of
+a precisely similar kind to those of the outward, with the possible
+variation that we may find a lunatic asylum awaiting us in the place of
+an international welcome. These are the odds: ponder them for the last
+time.”
+
+“I have pondered them over and over again,” said Carysfort, “and for me
+they have no terrors.”
+
+“I object to no item in the Professor’s black list except the
+terrestrial lunatic asylum,” said Abercromby, “and we have only to
+avoid British territory, and, being true Britons, we shall be sure of a
+hearty welcome.”
+
+“To me the journey to Venus is but the prelude to a longer journey,”
+replied Clarence Radcliffe, “but, till my work is done, I shall not ask
+to die. I have risen superior to that, chiefly through the kindness of
+you, my brothers.”
+
+“Jackson, what have you to say?” said the Professor.
+
+“Bless you, sir! I’ll just be after going where you go, and if the
+Lord brings us all safe back I’ll tell the folks at home that I’ve
+been and gone and had a real good time of it. But you must leave me
+the polishing-up of the machine, sir. You’ll do the steering, and I
+the scrubbing. When I laid my old mother to rest in Elton churchyard I
+buried the last who would miss me, and I thought as how I would like to
+go clear away, only you are taking me a bit farther than I reckoned.”
+
+“Well done, honest Tom,” said Carysfort. “If every master had as good a
+helper as Carmichael has in you, there would be a little more sensible
+work carried out in this spoiled land of ours.”
+
+“Just one word, Professor,” put in Abercromby. “If things go all right,
+how long do you mean to stay away?”
+
+“Only a few months if Venus is not inhabited, two or three years if
+it is,” replied the Professor. “I have written out a full and concise
+account of our intentions and shall leave it behind me. I have also
+addressed a letter to the Home Secretary. Of course the secret of our
+discovery is carefully guarded, but I have told who we are and where
+we are going. I have left full instructions as to my property and this
+packet shall be posted as soon as you have all signed your names to it.
+Another shall be sent to the Mayor of Newcastle, and a third shall be
+left on the table. And now we had better sign, as we are all agreed.”
+
+This having been done, the two postal packets were sent off. Radcliffe
+asked that they should invoke the Divine blessing upon their
+enterprise, to which all consented, and then they silently left the
+house, and proceeded to the place, sheltered behind high walls, where
+the Asteroid was poised ready for its vast and thrilling flight.
+
+Abercromby remarked that they had not as many to see them start as
+Columbus or Sir John Franklin had, to which fact the Professor yielded
+the most hearty and even cheerful assent.
+
+The final preparations took up a shorter time than was expected, and
+at 7.30 p.m. on that cloudy July evening Carmichael took his post in
+the conning-tower; the others stood upon the outer balcony, Abercromby
+assuring the Professor that as soon as they had got outside the earth’s
+atmosphere he would button up his greatcoat and leisurely come in.
+
+“Farewell to England!” said the engineer simply. “May we find our
+country a little more open to common sense when we come back.”
+
+Jackson evidently thought that Mr. Frank would give them a colossal
+joke at the moment of starting, but perhaps, unknown to himself, the
+power to do so failed him at the last moment. He put his arm through
+Clarence Radcliffe’s and said, “Say something for me, old chap; I’m
+hanged if I can.”
+
+“May God bless all in the world who are in sorrow, and may we bring
+them back something to help them,” answered Radcliffe.
+
+“Start the car, Professor, or I shall make an ass of myself,” sung out
+Abercromby. “No, hold hard, please. Tom has got a last message for the
+old country.”
+
+“God save the King,” said Jackson, pulling off his cap.
+
+“Most correct and admirable,” replied Abercromby; “nothing could be
+less open to hostile criticism. Now, Professor, if Nelson were here he
+would tell us that every man’s duty was to fly. Go ahead, and just give
+us a peep of Northumbria before we finally vanish.”
+
+A moment more and Newbiggin, from the old church on the wave-worn
+promontory to the Eagle Rocks, lay many hundreds of feet below them.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER IV
+
+ THE LUNAR PERIL
+
+
+Within a few minutes the travellers had entered the thick veil of the
+clouds, and were forced to beat a speedy retreat into the shelter of
+the upper deck. Rain poured down, there was a sharp flash of lightning
+followed by a rattling peal of thunder. Carmichael increased the speed,
+and soon the cloud region was traversed and they climbed higher and
+higher into the star-spangled night. Soon the lights at the entrance
+of the Tyne came into view, and a dull illumination to the west showed
+them the busy hive of Newcastle. Gradually it became impossible to make
+out even the largest objects originated by man, but the great grey
+landscape opened and widened; they could see the Cumberland Mountains,
+and the crescent moon, now wondrously brilliant, lit up the sea beyond.
+
+Presently England itself became a dark grey patch girt with the silvery
+sea, and then the countries of Europe almost took the form of a model
+map, only it wanted the daylight to illuminate it.
+
+Carmichael now insisted that the whole party should come within, and he
+did not need to employ arguments. Already they were choking and gasping
+and nearly benumbed with cold. Just as they entered, Carysfort having
+hermetically sealed the partition, they saw a broad fan of light flash
+out upon the eastern horizon, and the sun rose and bathed the enormous
+circle of the earth with his rosy-tinted rays. Trailing belts of clouds
+hung over Russia and Eastern Siberia, but over India and mid-China the
+weather was resplendent.
+
+“There is Mount Everest,” said Carysfort, pointing to a snow-white
+hillock, as it looked to them, “nearly 30,000 feet high, five miles and
+more. What would Major Everest have said, when he was measuring it by
+trigonometry in 1847, if he could have seen it as we see it!”
+
+“We are 170 miles already,” said Carmichael. “I am going to double
+speed, so prepare for a surprise.”
+
+Every minute now made a perceptible difference. At last the circle of
+the entire globe was seen, the heavens gradually turned from dark blue
+to black, the stars shone out, the sun’s rays began to blaze like a
+fiery corona, all grew silent and still, the faintest apparent motion
+ceased, the earth seemed every few minutes to shrink to a smaller
+circle, while the moon, which hung in space, appeared to grow in size
+and splendour.
+
+The awful spectacle daunted even the brave men who had dared everything
+to behold it. Even Abercromby and Carysfort averted their faces from
+the window. Radcliffe alone stood with folded arms in a state of
+abstraction.
+
+“I shall now quadruple the electric pressure,” said Carmichael; “the
+sooner we get used to these things the better.”
+
+The Professor was just about to put his decision into practice when
+Radcliffe stopped him by suggesting that this might be a unique
+opportunity for solving the problem of the terrestrial polar regions.
+
+A powerful telescope was soon fixed into position and each in turn made
+full use of it. The result was not very satisfactory. The North Pole
+was so hidden in clouds and vapour that it was well-nigh impossible to
+form a verdict. With the South Pole it was different. They could see a
+ring of white mountains with Mounts Erebus and Terror clearly visible,
+but beyond was an antarctic continent with a greyish patch in the
+centre just at the Pole itself. But it gave them no evidence of being
+inhabited.
+
+The moon was shining to the left of them, considerably larger in size
+than it appears from the earth. Carysfort raised the question whether
+it was worth while to attempt a landing upon it. The question was
+decided in the negative. They would pass near enough to solve that
+problem of the outer or invisible side of the disk which is never seen
+by man.
+
+The Professor told them that they would cross the lunar orbit in two
+hours’ time, when they would pass it at a distance of about 11,500
+miles.
+
+“I dare not risk our great enterprise in the attempt to alight upon a
+small world which the best science of our times has pronounced to be
+airless, waterless, and lifeless,” said the Professor. “To land upon a
+world without an atmosphere would be a most dangerous undertaking, and
+we could do no exploring when we got there, but would have to remain
+cooped up in our machine. We could not sail over its surface, for we
+should have no atmosphere in which the fans could work. If we had made
+up our minds to go there, we would have faced the risks and prepared
+accordingly; but we have something far more important lying before us.”
+
+“I read in a book while at Oxford,” said Radcliffe, “that earth and
+moon should not be regarded as planet and satellite, but rather as two
+stars revolving around each other.”
+
+“Precisely so,” answered the Professor. “It is absurd to liken the moon
+to one of the satellites of Jupiter or Saturn. A planet of 90,000 miles
+in diameter may have five small worlds gravitating around him, but a
+world of less than 8000 miles cannot, strictly speaking, regard a world
+of 2200 miles as a humble dependent.”
+
+“Was the moon ever a part of the earth, and did it fill the bed of the
+present Pacific Ocean before it was split asunder?” asked Abercromby.
+
+“My dear fellow, you announce the most astounding theories as though
+they were ordinary facts,” said the Professor.
+
+“Of course I do. I want to beat Radcliffe at astronomy, and to
+anticipate his speculations.”
+
+“I was not there to see,” replied Carmichael. “That there is something
+very peculiar about the relationships of earth and moon, different to
+other bodies in the solar system, I readily grant. Mars, for instance,
+being a small planet, has two microscopic satellites, but there is no
+satellite that bears any such proportion to its primary as the moon
+does. I hardly believe in the disruptive theory; I am more disposed
+to think that the moon and the earth were always independent, and
+that perhaps the moon got caught by the earth’s attraction and was
+henceforth chained by it.”
+
+Jackson here appeared upon the scene and enquired if there were any
+orders for supper. Abercromby disputed the title and declared it must
+be breakfast as the sun was shining with unpleasant brilliancy.
+
+“When we are well clear of the moon we will certainly have a good
+square meal, but it is not worth while, for the sake of this, to come
+to a disastrous collision,” said Carmichael.
+
+A cup of coffee and some biscuits were handed round to each, and then
+the whole party resorted to the windows. Speed was increased and the
+Asteroid made direct for the orbit of the moon, but carefully avoided
+a heading of the prow towards her. The circle of the lunar globe was
+becoming every few minutes wider till it greatly exceeded in dimensions
+the apparent size of the earth.
+
+The Professor drew out a large map of the lunar disk and they could
+see for themselves how accurate it was. Slowly, as it seemed to them,
+the great orb turned upon its axis, and, as the minimum distance was
+reached, the outer hemisphere gradually outspread itself. There was
+nothing notably different from the earthward side. There were the
+same chain of mountains, the same circular ramparts, the same extinct
+craters, the same desolate stony plains. The only difference that could
+be noticed, if any, was that the outer side of the moon bore less
+manifest traces of violent convulsion, the heights and depths were on
+a slightly smaller scale. There was one large plain near the equator
+which might in earlier ages have been a fertile undulating country, or
+even the bed of an ocean.
+
+“Well, this finally disposes of the theory of existing lunar races,”
+said the engineer.
+
+“With our powerful instruments and looking through an airless void, we
+should see traces of human handiwork had there ever been any,” observed
+Radcliffe. “What an awful world, a veritable picture of hell. Wherever
+the sun’s rays fall direct there is insufferable heat; wherever you
+step out of them, only by a few yards, insufferable cold. Hell is the
+easiest place to find in all the universe.”
+
+“I have always thought so,” quietly answered Carysfort. “We do not know
+all the secrets of the black gulfs of space. Outside the Milky Way, for
+instance, in what astronomers call the ‘Coal Pit,’ what is there?”
+
+“But all here is brilliant sunlight,” protested Abercromby. “Where are
+the black gulfs?”
+
+“The first begins outside the solar system, between our sun and Alpha
+Centauri, said to be the nearest of the fixed stars,” remarked the
+Professor. “When our sun had become a tiny star, and Alpha Centauri,
+though you rushed at it with the speed of light, kept you waiting for a
+three years’ journey before it even gave you a visible disk to look at,
+there would be time for days of darkness, and many of them. I am not
+a theologian, I am a pure scientific thinker, but I do not put all my
+thoughts on the table. I only give them when asked.”
+
+“Come, I say, we shall be feeling ghastly if this subject goes on.
+Suppose, now that we are clear of that uncanny moon, we have a meal,”
+said Abercromby. “I am fast getting like the boy who, when his father
+at the parish tea told him he must eat for to-morrow as well as to-day,
+informed his dad that he had not done eating for yesterday yet!”
+
+“Well, my frivolous young man,” said the engineer, “Jackson will no
+doubt appease us, but do not be always putting serious subjects aside.”
+
+Abercromby was just going to acknowledge the engineer’s rebuke when
+he happened to look round and, finding a pretext for evading the
+necessity, suddenly called out, “Why the moon has slipped down right
+under our feet!”
+
+The Professor gave a startled cry, and dashed up the steps into the
+conning-tower.
+
+“What the deuce has happened?” said Abercromby, turning pale.
+
+“We are falling,” said the engineer.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER V
+
+ THE METEORIC STORM
+
+
+For a moment or two Carysfort and the others stood in tense silence.
+The Professor raised the electric pressure to the maximum, ten miles
+a second. He was only just in time--a minute more and no motive force
+could have availed against the lunar attraction.
+
+Even as it was Carmichael did not breathe freely when the distance
+increased until it became evident that the increase was multiplying
+itself in widening proportions.
+
+“Well, we had run ourselves into a ghastly hole,” said the engineer. “I
+wonder when the next will confront us?”
+
+“Some millions of miles onwards when we have our big tussle with the
+sun,” replied the Professor. “My plan will be to slow down somewhat
+till we cut the orbit of Venus, and then try to pursue our path along
+it, instead of crossing it; we shall travel slower than the planet and
+we can let it overtake us.”
+
+“Where is Mercury?” asked Radcliffe.
+
+“Circling round the other side of the sun,” answered the Professor. “It
+will not add to our dangers, for it will not interpose its attraction
+to pull us sunwards for several weeks.”
+
+As soon as the distance from the moon made any danger from that source
+negligible, the party sat down to their first regular meal in the
+dining-room. Conversation flowed freely now that the danger was passed.
+They spent the time in mapping out the programme of their life on the
+Asteroid before they should near Venus. They made an artificial chart
+of day and night, allotting sixteen hours to work and study, and eight
+hours to repose. Two were always to mount guard during the rest time;
+one to steer, the other to watch.
+
+The Professor advised that the first thing to be done was for him and
+the engineer to give the rest of the party full instructions as to the
+use of the machinery and the guidance of the machine. Every one would
+then be available and every hand ready in a moment of crisis. When off
+duty each was left free to pass his time exactly as he liked, though
+Carmichael insisted that all should take exercise at stated intervals,
+and Abercromby put in practice a series of gymnastics on a small scale,
+and used to make Radcliffe, of all people, take a prominent part in
+them. Chess was a source of pleasurable interest. All the party worked
+together in perfect harmony and brotherliness, except for one passing
+incident which produced a transient unpleasantness.
+
+Abercromby one day when seated at lunch asked the Professor if he
+thought they would find Venus a feminine or a masculine world.
+
+“Nonsense!” said Carmichael, a little irritably, for his views about
+the fair sex were well known to the Cambridge men to be the reverse
+of complimentary. “There is no such thing as a feminine planet. The
+very idea is only mythology and legend. Of course Venus is supposed
+to be the planet of love, and Mars the planet of war, but that is all
+classical rubbish, you know.”
+
+“Of course,” assented Carysfort; “but we shall have to keep a sharp
+look-out on this young man if by any luck the inhabitants of Venus were
+all or mostly women.”
+
+“Luck!” exclaimed the Professor. “Good heavens! I should start back to
+the earth at once. But I do really think, though I know Abercromby will
+bark at me, that a parson I once met spoke near the truth when he said
+it was easier to reach the heart of a man than the heart of a woman.”
+
+“You cannot reach any heart till you possess the key to it, and that
+you may, alas! sometimes mistake,” answered Radcliffe; adding hotly,
+“If this conversation is carried any further I shall leave the room.”
+
+“I vote the parson, whoever he was, a donkey,” said Abercromby, “and as
+he is not here the remark will have a soothing effect upon our agitated
+nerves.”
+
+“Let it drop, as we are not likely to agree,” replied the Professor.
+Radcliffe, however, quietly left the room.
+
+“Well,” said Carysfort, “there is no accounting for some people;
+we shall have two to look after when we get to this incomparable
+planet. Abercromby will fall in love with the first female savage
+he meets, unless she brings his courtship to an abrupt close, and
+Radcliffe--well, he will probably do the last thing that we expect he
+_will_ do.”
+
+This was the first and only time that the inhabitants of Venus were
+discussed on the romantic side; all agreeing that it would be best to
+postpone the question till they got there.
+
+But a tremendous excitement, and an acute danger, was at hand, which
+stopped all talk on any subject for a good while. When they were about
+eight millions of miles from the earth--about a third part of their
+journey, the engineer sighted with his telescope a large comet with a
+small nucleus, with a fiery train of meteorites spread out in sparkling
+streams, fan-shaped, and radiating in various directions. The object
+was but small, and at first it was not easy to trace the exact course
+which it was taking. The Professor thought it would pass some twenty
+thousand miles from them, and that they would be in no way affected
+by it. But as the hours went on the situation grew exceedingly grave,
+for it became evident that the cometary train might nearly, if not
+actually, cross their path. Moreover, the mass of burning meteors
+constantly grew in apparent size, and presented a fiery barrier
+actually looming before them.
+
+All the party were on the alert, and both the Professor and the
+engineer went to the conning-tower and took a united part in the
+steering.
+
+“Are we going to be set on fire, or what is to happen?” said Abercromby
+in a serious tone. “We seem to be heading straight for a volcanic
+eruption.”
+
+“The fire cannot reach us except by direct collision,” answered
+Radcliffe. “What I fear is that the meteorites will bombard us and
+damage the roof and sides of the Asteroid.”
+
+A little later and the danger approached still nearer. It was a
+veritable meteoric storm into which they seemed rushing with blind
+speed. The burning meteors did not, of course, in the void of space
+burn steadily, but only kindled when they came into collision with each
+other. Then outbursts of many coloured fires lighted up the gulf of
+space, some burning for a few minutes, others dying out in a heap of
+calcined ashes which almost immediately became invisible. Fortunately,
+they were able to avoid the full brunt of the storm, the nucleus of the
+comet passing at a considerable distance ahead of them, but they had to
+endure several nerve-shaking concussions.
+
+Once the Asteroid was struck in the prow and a small amount of
+damage done. Once a meteoric stone glanced obliquely from the roof,
+leaping into flames as it did so. The Asteroid was coated over with
+a fire-proof asbestos substance, and to this they largely owed their
+safety. Two masses showing up dark against the sun’s rays bore down
+upon them, but before they could reach them they struck one another and
+two dark bodies formed instantly one blazing mass; this resolved itself
+into a fiery mist which rotated rapidly upon its new-formed axis.
+
+All this while the Professor and the engineer stuck to their posts with
+white set faces, for they well knew the awfulness of the peril. When it
+was over, and the heavens had resumed their wonted tranquillity, they
+left the conning-tower and joined the others upon the upper deck.
+
+“We have been almost wrecked,” said Carysfort. “Every moment I thought
+we were going to be smashed up. I repeated two little prayers my mother
+taught me, keeping my hand on the machinery all the time.”
+
+“That is just the right combination,” said Radcliffe. “Work as if all
+depended upon yourself; pray as if all depended upon Another.”
+
+“You saw a world created, I suppose,” said Carmichael.
+
+“What in the name of all that is astounding do you mean?” said
+Abercromby, staring at him.
+
+“Why, my friend, when those two meteors collided and formed one fiery
+mass, that is how the thing is done,” answered the Professor.
+
+Radcliffe then said: “You know these matters better than I do,
+gentlemen, but have we not seen a way in which science, which tells us
+that the sun will die and the earth be a cold corpse, may be right in
+the abstract but wrong in fact. Suppose a much larger mass of meteors
+falls into the sun, might he not renew his youth and the other planets
+theirs?”
+
+“When the Arab vows perpetual fidelity to his ladylove in the Eastern
+song he swears to be true
+
+ Till the stars grow old,
+ Till the sun grows cold,
+ Till the leaves of the Judgment book unfold.”
+
+The remark was Abercromby’s, who thought it more cheerful to sing it.
+
+Radcliffe, ignoring the poetic interpolation, went on: “Is it not
+feasible that the world may be ended some day by a sudden accession to
+the sun’s heat through collision of the sun with an extinct star, or
+the invasion of the solar system by a fire mist, and that afterwards
+may come a new order of things?”
+
+“‘Death is the gate of life,’ so the proverb runs,” put in the engineer.
+
+“I do not dispute the possibility of these and similar theories proving
+true,” said Carmichael slowly. “That human affairs may be wound up by
+a blow from outer space is a proposition to which any thinking man
+will agree; but don’t be in a hurry to try to make science square with
+the Bible--watch, wait, gather facts, and patiently build up your
+conclusions about them. Solomon and the Roman Pliny, the Eastern king
+and the classical gentleman, had one great merit, they _observed_.
+Parsons and scientists are always apt to rush to conclusions, one
+pretty nearly as much as the other. The theories of to-day may be the
+laughing-stock of to-morrow, but the patient labour of to-day may
+be the heritage of to-morrow. I have now preached two lay sermons,
+Radcliffe, one to you, the other to myself.”
+
+“Then, Professor, you must be feeling pretty well used up,” said
+Abercromby. “Suppose we have a cup of tea. Wellington is not in it, for
+he never fought a comet in mid-skies and preached twice afterwards.”
+
+Tom, with a grin upon his honest face, put the tea-things on the table
+and announced with immaculate gravity, “Tea is ready, gentlemen.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER VI
+
+ INTO THE BLACK GULF
+
+
+The peril from the solar attraction did not prove as great as they had
+feared. Carmichael had chosen the most favourable moment for leaving
+the earth, when Venus would be travelling directly towards them, and
+would interpose as a shield between them and the sun.
+
+Before the new orbit was reached they slackened their speed, and
+that things were going well was soon evident by the planet appearing
+beneath them as a gradually brightening star in the depths of space.
+Many anxious hours and many elaborate mathematical calculations had
+to be spent and taken before the Professor and the engineer felt able
+to communicate reassuring news. Not till they had got within five
+millions of miles from Venus did they feel that the solar peril might
+be regarded as over.
+
+All the members of the party, except Carmichael, seemed to enjoy a
+rebound of confidence and hope, but the Professor remained anxious and
+abstracted. He told them repeatedly that the peril they had feared
+was past, and that they might reach Venus in safety--at least with no
+greater danger than the earth if they were returning to it--but this
+did not enlighten them as to the real cause of his concern. If they
+asked him more closely he returned only evasive answers.
+
+One day he called the engineer aside and they had a long private talk.
+It lasted more than an hour. At length the two came out of the cabin
+and went back to the dining-room, where Abercromby was trying to solve
+a chess problem.
+
+“Is anything gone queer?” he said to the Professor. “Tell us; we can
+stand it. Is the machine giving out, or what is the trouble?”
+
+“If you want to find a wife in Venus, and Radcliffe a mission, I fear
+you will both be disappointed. For myself, I am too disgusted and sick
+at heart to go into the matter. We have run the most awful risks, and
+for what? to be rewarded at the last with polar ice and worse than
+tropical furnaces. In all probability there are no inhabitants of
+Venus--at least none that are human.”
+
+“But, my dear and respected Professor, how have you found out these
+agreeable facts at five millions of miles distance?” said Abercromby.
+
+Carmichael did not answer. Radcliffe fixed an appealing look at
+Carysfort, who at once took up the subject.
+
+“Well, gentlemen, I suppose it is about time we told you. I always
+feared it might be so, but we hoped it would not be. Now our fears are
+convictions.”
+
+“And our hopes have taken a run round the stars to keep themselves
+warm,” said Abercromby. “Now I will not talk nonsense again till you
+have said your say.”
+
+“The truth is that those astronomers are right who thought that Venus
+revolved round the sun with such an inclination of its axis that the
+sun was always in the same place, according to latitude; that there
+were practically no seasons or alternations of day and night, but that
+while one side of the planet was always lighted, the other was always
+dark. Now you can judge what that means in the long run. Half the
+planet is locked in perpetual ice-bound cold, worse than any of our
+Arctic winters, while the other has a sun always pouring down light and
+heat upon it, twice as much as the earth receives and that every day
+and all day long.”
+
+“But surely, even then it must make an enormous difference what height
+the sun occupies in the sky?” said Radcliffe.
+
+“That is the only hope,” replied Carysfort.
+
+“Well, then, let us steer for the North Pole of the planet and alight
+near to the boundary between sunshine and shadow. At least we know that
+there is an atmosphere.”
+
+“Yes, and a very dense one as regards depth; perhaps five hundred
+miles or more,” said the Professor, at length breaking his silence.
+“But although we shall certainly do what Radcliffe suggests, for it is
+the only possible course to take, I can hold out little hope of any
+result. The chief danger to be dreaded is storm and tempest, electrical
+and cyclonic disturbances caused by the meeting of opposing currents
+of heated and cold air. If we can surmount this, we can make our way
+cautiously over the lighted surface until the heat shall drive us back.”
+
+“There is another very serious trouble,” said the engineer. “We had
+hoped that, as we drew near to Venus, we should be able to take careful
+observations of its features as we did in the case of the moon, and
+could have carried much further had it been necessary; but, as we shall
+approach Venus on its darkened side, we shall see practically nothing
+till we get there. A pleasant landing that will be.”
+
+“It is obvious that we ought not to, and must not, alight upon the
+planet without seeing where we are,” said Carmichael. “When we reach
+the atmosphere we must throw out the searchlights, but this will be a
+dangerous operation.”
+
+“It will set all the dogs barking, you mean,” remarked Abercromby. “But
+seriously, Professor, do you think it is all up with us?”
+
+“Not as to our safety perhaps, but as to the success of our enterprise.
+What good will it be to reach a world of fire and desolation?”
+
+Before Venus actually crossed the path of the sun they did their best
+to take whatever observations were possible. But vast belts of clouds
+hid the lighted surface, screening its actual wonders from their view.
+
+“We have verified Herschel’s opinion that Venus has an extremely dense
+atmosphere,” said Radcliffe. “I wonder whether we shall presently
+verify Schroeter’s that its mountains are twenty miles in height.”
+
+“My dear Radcliffe, Herschel is quite antiquated; and as for the other
+Johnnie you referred to, he is nearly as ancient as Julius Cæsar,” said
+Abercromby.
+
+“But there is this to be noted,” remarked the engineer, “that the
+foreign astronomers of a past day could often use their telescopes
+in a brilliant sky, like Italy, for instance, whereas in England the
+most perfect and up-to-date instruments are apt to be put out of use
+by constant bad weather. Give me an old-fashioned telescope and I will
+make something of it if there be only a clear sky. Moreover, I think
+in the olden days men turned more attention to the physical side of
+astronomy than they do now.”
+
+“As to the supposed stupendous mountains in Venus, we shall soon find
+out all about it if we are not knocked to pieces,” said the Professor;
+“but I will point out that the highest earthly mountains are really
+ten miles high, because they ought to be measured, not as we see them,
+but from the ocean bed itself. As to Venus, astronomers have noticed
+certain slight roughnesses on the edge of the crescent, when it appears
+to us crescent in shape, and these may indicate the tops of mountains
+caught by the sun’s rays.”
+
+“It’s a great nuisance that Venus is not on the outer side of the earth
+instead of on the sunward,” said Carysfort. “As the matter stands, when
+she is furthest off she appears as a full moon, when she is nearest she
+is only a crescent. Add to this, that she recedes but a short distance
+from the sun, and is therefore only a morning and evening star.”
+
+So they chatted on while the gulf which separated them from their goal
+grew less and less. When they retired to rest they were only three
+millions of miles away.
+
+Meeting at the breakfast-table next morning, the Professor was asked
+when he thought the journey would be over.
+
+His answer was in about sixty hours; he was gradually reducing the
+inherent speed, and when the time drew near for the actual descent he
+would pull against it by increasing the repulsive force of the engines.
+
+Their supply of air, which had been manufactured by chemical process,
+had worked perfectly, the inner temperature of the Asteroid being
+always at a moderate level.
+
+As the hours advanced they all noticed a dimness spreading over the
+heavens; this was caused by the disk of Venus gradually encroaching
+upon that of the sun. The diminution of the solar light was at first
+not unpleasing, but when at last it faded out altogether and an intense
+darkness supervened, relieved only by the stars, the travellers knew by
+instinct that they were nearing their last and their greatest peril. By
+lunch-time the size of Venus had become very enlarged, but, unhappily,
+they could see no feature nor landscape, they could only tell where the
+planet was by the increasing eclipse of the stars upon the floor of the
+heavens.
+
+Abercromby wanted them to cut this short, for it was getting on his
+nerves.
+
+Slowly, and more slowly still, they felt their way down and down into
+the black gulf.
+
+The Professor and the engineer never left their posts, but only took
+hurried mouthfuls of refreshment which Jackson brought to them. Poor
+Jackson was shivering with alarm, which he tried to conceal under a
+fussy attention to his duties. Even his polishing and scrubbing failed
+to soothe him.
+
+Frank Abercromby was in a perpetual fidget, now and then asking
+what the dickens was going to happen, and sometimes making use of
+unclassical language. Radcliffe stood beside the windows silent, but
+his face was deadly pale.
+
+When the black globe beneath them covered the whole depth of the sky,
+Carmichael began to set in motion the repelling power.
+
+It was a terribly anxious crisis, for if he used it too much he might
+be actually retreating from his destination, if too little, they might
+be dashed to pieces.
+
+“You had better go down on your knees, Radcliffe,” said Carmichael,
+“and do for us what is more becoming in you perhaps than in me.”
+
+Radcliffe prayed earnestly and simply that at this awful moment help
+might be given them, that if they had been presumptuous it was for the
+good of their fellow-men, not for their own advancement.
+
+Suddenly as he rose from his knees Abercromby shouted, almost crazy
+with excitement, “Come here, all of you. What is this going on down
+yonder?”
+
+A dull red illumination appeared, of no great size, but they could not
+tell how vast it might be in reality.
+
+“It is a volcano, glowing in the atmosphere of Venus, near to the
+Pole,” said Carmichael. “Now we know to what point to steer.”
+
+Not long after, though minutes seemed ages, a slight rise of
+temperature became noticeable.
+
+“We are in the atmosphere,” said Carysfort. “Start the fans.”
+
+“They can be set going from within,” exclaimed Carmichael.
+
+The levers were turned and the fan wheels were seen to revolve, though
+very feebly. Half the peril was over, as far as the descent was
+concerned, for they had now the means of using their machine as an
+airship. They steered in a diagonal line towards the burning mountain,
+and, keeping exactly at the same height, they made use of the summit to
+guide them as to their level of altitude. A few moments more and a line
+of brilliant light appeared on the horizon. They were on the North Pole
+of Venus, four miles from its surface.
+
+In front spread an apparently boundless ocean, encumbered with blocks
+of bluish and purple-white ice, which of course tended every mile
+southwards to become smaller and smaller, while, to the north, they
+were crystallised into vast masses thrown up into the most weird
+and fantastic shapes. The great sun of Venus, twice as large as the
+terrestrial sun, flamed in rosy splendour upon the southern horizon.
+The sea was restless and agitated and a keen wind was blowing. The sky
+was laden with fleecy clouds of wild and stormy appearance. They were
+at a vast height, higher even than the Asteroid.
+
+“Well, gentlemen,” said the Professor, “we have faced the greatest
+hazard ever dared by man, and we look upon what the mortal eyes of
+humanity have never seen. Now let us take courage and face the problems
+of the future, resolved that, come what may, we will do our duty.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER VII
+
+ THE NORTHERN ISLAND
+
+
+Carmichael lowered somewhat the height of the Asteroid in a gradual
+diagonal, till they were only at a moderate altitude, so as to be able
+to observe anything of interest at reasonably close quarters. The first
+thing to be done was to ascertain whether the air of Venus was suited
+to human beings from another world.
+
+Fortunately, the stormy commotion had its seat in the higher regions
+of the atmosphere, at least on that occasion, so that finding more
+reposeful conditions nearer to the surface, the Professor advised that
+the experiment should be tried.
+
+Radcliffe stepped forward to one of the large windows and was about to
+unfasten when Carysfort shouted out, “Hold, man! are you mad? Do you
+suppose that we want a whole blizzard of untried air let loose upon us?
+Allow Carmichael to manage this business.”
+
+Poor Radcliffe stepped back aghast, while Abercromby laughed. The
+Professor, with a smile, moved to one of the side walls and took down
+a case of books, which revealed a small round panel about as large as
+a crown piece. He motioned them to stand clear, and then he touched a
+spring and the panel flew open.
+
+“Bravo!” said Frank; “you have foreseen every blessed contrivance that
+we shall want.”
+
+“I only hope I have,” said he. “Now, you fellows, just take a sniff and
+see how you like it.”
+
+A thin, crisp current of air, slightly perfumed and perfectly
+delicious, penetrated slowly through the room. The panel was left open
+for ten minutes, till the Professor, quite reassured, told them that
+they might enjoy an even larger dose than Radcliffe would have given
+them--they could venture out upon the balcony. With a hop and a skip
+Abercromby was in the open air within a few seconds, though he used
+most unparliamentary language, for the first thing he nearly did in
+Venus was to lose his hat, he only just contrived to catch it in time,
+or, as he said, it would have been the first gift that the earth would
+have bestowed upon a new planet.
+
+“The waves are not much higher than our own waves, though they seem to
+show a great swell and current,” said the engineer.
+
+“The reason is,” replied the Professor, “that Venus having no moon, and
+the sun’s attraction making up for it, the tides here will be somewhat
+like the terrestrial.”
+
+For two hours they sped on to the south, the sun slowly rising in the
+sky but the heat not increasing to any great or serious extent. The
+ice-packs had of course disappeared, but the wide open sea stretched
+before them with its fresh and turbulent waves. At the end of the two
+hours a great and startling discovery set all their hearts wildly
+beating with hope. On the southern horizon appeared a line of high
+cliffs rising straight out of the water, whether they betokened island
+or continent they could not tell.
+
+As the Asteroid drew nearer--for they increased their rate of
+speed--they saw with some regret that the cliffs presented no
+possibility of anchorage or landing-place. Not that this mattered
+to them, for an airship was quite free and independent of any naval
+convenience, but it made it most improbable that they would find an
+inhabited country.
+
+Directly they had soared above the cliffs a cry of delight escaped
+them: they were in a crater-like land. A lake shone in the centre,
+while the country, thickly wooded in places and interspread with
+luxuriant meadow, sloped upwards to a chain of hills about twenty miles
+away to the south. Westwards they could trace the curving line of the
+elevated coast, but eastwards it was not so easy to tell how far the
+land extended.
+
+“Thank God! At last! at last!” exclaimed Radcliffe fervently. “We will
+be content with what we have.”
+
+“The best attitude in which to look for more,” said the Professor
+quietly. “There are no traces of human beings, civilised or savage,
+but the locality will suit perfectly for a few days of rest and quiet
+explorations.”
+
+“Could we only know there _was_ a city on Venus,” remarked Carysfort,
+“I should scarcely like to drop down upon it the very first moment.
+Better to get acclimatised.”
+
+The Asteroid was steered to the south side of the lake, which was long
+and narrow. The Professor prudently selected a little hilltop looking
+down upon the lake, but sprinkled with trees and carpeted with rich,
+soft, mossy grass. Upon this the Asteroid carefully descended. It only
+required the grappling irons to be fixed in the ground and a lashing
+of ropes to the stems of two adjacent trees, and then a reasonably
+secure site would have been gained. It was rather a twilight land, for
+the sun was hidden behind the hills, but this was a relief and not a
+disadvantage.
+
+The first thing they did was to sit down to a quiet meal, which they
+partook of in the machine, for Carmichael would not hear of any
+out-of-door picnic. He insisted that no excursion should be taken till
+they had had some hours of sleep, and they were all nearly exhausted.
+
+The Professor and Jackson stepped down and attended to the safe
+securing of the machine, and then they had, in turns, the longest
+repose they had ever enjoyed since leaving their own world.
+
+When they met the next morning and were breakfasting, the first thing
+Abercromby wanted to hear was the programme for the day.
+
+“Now, gentlemen,” said the Professor, “I will just say one word on
+a certain subject, and then leave it to your good sense and hold my
+peace. God--for I believe in God--has brought us here after a frightful
+voyage across space, and perils both at either end, and occasionally
+in the midst, enough to have sent weaker men stark mad. Don’t let us,
+by any rashness or indiscretion, throw away all our advantages and
+perhaps our lives. They belong to the human race, not to ourselves. We
+want to live to return and to tell what we have seen. The peril of the
+air is past, but danger lurks in the fruits and flowers, in the water,
+in the soil, and also among the people, if there are any. Columbus was
+in no such danger ever, for, though all around him was new and strange,
+he was still on his own planet. Touch no food till some little time
+has passed, but live on our own earthly supplies, which will last us
+several months at the least. Taste no water till I have chemically
+analysed it. Do not indulge in dangerous climbing. Do not straggle away
+from the machine--at least, alone--and always carry your revolvers with
+you, so that you can use them as signals if you need them, not for
+defence. I should not say half as much as this were we in the wildest
+part of Central Africa. But here, in Venus, we are just like new-born
+children with all our experience to make as we go along, and all the
+learning of earth cannot directly help us, except in guiding our common
+sense. Now I have said my say. I am pleading for my brothers on the
+earth, for whom we have done and risked all this.”
+
+“I agree with everything you say,” replied Carysfort, “and will
+practise it. I suppose Cromwell would tell us, were he alive, to trust
+in God and keep our eyes open, which will be more important here than
+keeping our powder dry.”
+
+“I will go about in a bath-chair if it is to benefit humanity,” said
+Abercromby.
+
+“Very well,” said the Professor, just a tiny bit cross; “I take that
+remark to mean that you won’t be a donkey. Now let us change the
+subject.”
+
+They discussed at a considerable length what they should first set
+about. It was decided that two should be left behind on guard, and that
+a rocket should be sent up in the event of danger requiring the others
+to return. The travellers should be absent not more than three hours,
+they should walk to the western end of the lake and strike the cliffs
+at the angle of the shore so as to gain some idea of the coast-line
+away to the southern hills. In the rare event of some terrible danger
+overtaking them, the Asteroid should be brought to them, to scatter
+enemies, or to rescue from peril. The Professor would fire off a signal
+rocket himself. Their guns were not, on this occasion, to be used as
+signals, as they might want them for other purposes. Carysfort and
+Jackson consented to remain behind, and gave their word not to move out
+of sight of the machine, while one of them was always to be within it.
+
+Then the ladder was let down and the party trod the soil of Venus for
+the first time.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER VIII
+
+ FIRST EXPLORATIONS
+
+
+The mossy grass upon which they stepped was of a pale pink colour,
+indescribably beautiful, while the leaves of the trees were of various
+tints, though the prevailing colour was a greenish red. Here and
+there were trees purely green in foliage as on the earth, but these
+were rather the exception. Of shrub and thicket there was no great
+profusion, so that even in the woods they could have made their way
+easily; but they thought it more prudent to skirt the open shores of
+the lake. Flowers were very scanty, and such as there were did not
+exhibit either variety or comeliness; but, as the Professor remarked,
+they were practically in the Arctic circle of Venus and not in any
+tropical region. The whole landscape seemed very still, for the fierce
+wind had either died down or was pursuing its course in the upper
+regions of the mighty atmosphere of Venus. The clouds were grand beyond
+description, but they did not threaten any outburst of bad weather.
+The sky was of a paler blue than the earthly sky, and the trailing
+cloud-belts soared to a much loftier height. Presently they caught
+sight of several large birds whirling at a vast distance above them;
+they seemed to be of great size with wide-extended wings. It was not
+easy to judge of their colour, but they had bills of formidable
+length; they were soaring away to the plateau of heights that bounded
+the south, and appeared to be settling upon them.
+
+“This is the first specimen of life we have seen, Professor,” said
+Radcliffe; “may it prove the herald of that which is nobler and better.”
+
+“Not a trace of it at present,” replied Carmichael; “not a footprint
+upon the ground, not a mark upon the trees.”
+
+“But I do not see how beings resembling us could get here,” answered
+Radcliffe, “unless this turns out to be the northern end of a great
+continent. There is not a place where a ship of any sort or size could
+disembark anybody. What climber, even if he were a monkey, could mount
+those stupendous cliffs?”
+
+“Well, now,” said Abercromby, “suppose we have a little chat over
+probabilities. Don’t you think that it is possible by scientific
+inference to reason a little as to the people in this planet?”
+
+“How do you propose to start?” said the Professor.
+
+“Is it not a great point, to begin with, that the gravitation force of
+Venus is the same as ours? On Mars, they tell us, we should be cutting
+capers every time we put a foot to the ground, while on Jupiter we
+should be crushed into the very soil and turned into mincemeat.”
+
+“True enough,” said the Professor. “This certainly makes it easier for
+Venus to be inhabited.”
+
+“Then, again, Venus is younger than the earth, having been evolved from
+the sun at a later time. May we not argue, then, that we should find
+its civilised races much less advanced than our own?”
+
+“My dear fellow, your argument bristles over with guesswork. It is not
+by any means certain that Laplace’s theory about planetary evolution
+is right, but if it be correct it may prove too much, for we may have
+arrived here centuries before human life is to begin; and lastly, you
+cannot argue from one world to another as to the rate at which man
+advances. Human progress has always been spiral, never in a straight
+line.”
+
+“There is nothing, so far as I can see, to make life impossible even
+to us,” observed Radcliffe, “much less to races born and bred upon the
+planet.”
+
+“Don’t be too sure,” said Carmichael. “How would you propose to eat if
+we had no supplies of our own? I have not seen a single fruit as yet,
+whether wholesome or the opposite.”
+
+“Look, look, a waterfall!” cried Abercromby, and sure enough, a stream
+came foaming over a rocky ledge and poured its waters into the lake.
+
+“Lovely, is it not?” he said to Radcliffe.
+
+“Yes! I suppose so,” answered Radcliffe, gazing at it abstractedly.
+
+“Come along, we have seen cascades and falls in our own country,” said
+the Professor.
+
+They climbed a small hill at the head of the waterfall, at the summit
+of which they looked down upon a deeper and thicker belt of forest.
+Just before entering it they saw some white bones lying bleaching upon
+the ground; the Professor ran to them and picking up one of the largest
+very carefully examined it. He said it must have belonged to a large
+animal which he should judge to have been comparatively harmless, but
+whether it had died or been torn in pieces it was difficult to say.
+
+So much time had now elapsed that it was judged advisable not to
+proceed further, but to return to the Asteroid, and then take a longer
+excursion the next time and continue the same line of exploration. The
+homeward journey was uneventful till they had come within about half
+a mile, when they were startled by a gunshot which reverberated right
+across to the southern hills.
+
+“Good gracious! what is the matter?” said Abercromby. “That must be
+Carysfort. I always tell him his gun goes off even when he is asleep.”
+
+The Professor looked vexed, for he did not want any sport in Venus; he
+was no sportsman himself, and he was afraid of attracting dangerous
+animals. However, when they got in sight of the machine they found that
+Jackson was the culprit, for he coolly told them he had shot a beast in
+order to cook him for dinner.
+
+“What the dickens did you do it for?” said Abercromby. “The Professor
+has said he will not take any food off this blessed world, unless the
+natives ask him in to afternoon tea.”
+
+“Now, sir, don’t be hard; this ’ere is equal to real cooked
+sucking-pig; you would want to eat him to the tail if he had one.”
+All the party laughed heartily. The first slaughtered victim on Venus
+was a spindle-shaped animal with short stuck-up ears long nose, and
+fawn-coloured skin.
+
+“Well, he is pretty enough, but I shall stick to my resolve,” said
+the Professor. So they supped upon terrestrial food after all; but,
+the next morning, Abercromby broke in upon them with the alarming
+intelligence that a savage must have been prowling around the machine,
+for he had come upon the dying embers of a fire and the beast had been
+nearly all devoured. It turned out that the devourer was Jackson, so he
+had his first Venusian meat in defiance of orders!
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The next day at breakfast there was a rather keen dispute amongst the
+party as to their future plans. Radcliffe and Abercromby wanted to
+start the machine, soar over the mountains, and at once decide whether
+human beings were discoverable or not. But, as the engineer had not
+yet taken a walk in their present neighbourhood, the Professor gave
+the casting vote in favour of remaining one more day and finishing the
+exploration of the country. Accordingly the engineer, accompanied by
+Abercromby and Radcliffe, set out soon after the meal was finished,
+while the Professor and his servant stayed behind.
+
+It was not till about six o’clock that the travellers came back. They
+had met with no special adventures till they had reached some caves
+about half a mile beyond the cascade. There they had been set upon by
+a wild beast of a most ferocious character, and, had they not been all
+close together and well armed, they would have come off badly. It took
+several shots from Carysfort’s gun before the animal was killed. It
+had surprised Abercromby first, knocked him down, torn his waistcoat,
+and had fixed its teeth in his shirt, and might have disabled him but
+for the coat and belt which he was wearing and for the speedy arrival
+of the others; with a supreme effort Abercromby managed to thrust a
+knapsack into the creature’s jaws, and, before it had been able to
+eject this and grind its way through to his flesh, Carysfort had shot
+it. The animal was something of the nature of a wolf, though there
+were many differences. They got back to the Asteroid in a rather
+excited state. Abercromby had spoiled a suit of clothes and had lost
+his knapsack. There were, of course, relays of clothing in the hold of
+the Asteroid, for they had taken care to be amply provided with all
+necessary things.
+
+The engineer was naturally the hero of the occasion, though he modestly
+disclaimed all praise. Poor Frank had had such a shaking that it was
+decided to spend yet another day quietly and to put off the final start
+until the morrow.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER IX
+
+ ACROSS THE CENTRAL OCEAN
+
+
+Early the next day, after they had breakfasted, Abercromby having
+assured them, with unnecessary vehemence, that he was as “fit as
+a fiddle,” they decided to resume the direct exploration of the
+planet. They did not doubt that the result of a twelve hours’ voyage
+in the machine with the high rate of speed which they had at their
+command would settle the question whether Venus was inhabited or not;
+Carmichael himself thought so, as was natural, for he could not have
+anticipated the setback which awaited them.
+
+At nine o’clock they started. The Asteroid rose to a height of several
+hundred feet, and, in a few minutes, it had crossed the fertile
+valley and had begun to mount higher and higher so as to clear the
+southern mountains. These were not of any considerable elevation,
+indeed, from the contour of the land their real height was much less
+than their apparent. But when the summit of the ridge had been gained
+both Abercromby and Carysfort broke out into a simultaneous volley of
+unclassical language.
+
+The land came to an abrupt end, and before them stretched away a
+shoreless ocean.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+To say the party were surprised would be to employ too mild a term,
+they were absolutely thunderstruck. They decided, however, to push on.
+There was nothing to be gained by a return to the island. They had now
+explored it sufficiently to be sure there were no human inhabitants.
+
+“I cannot yet believe that this island is the only dry land upon the
+whole surface of the planet,” said Radcliffe. “A world all ocean with
+only one island seems unthinkable.”
+
+“Yes! I expect there is more land,” replied the Professor, “but we
+have yet to discover whether it is suited to human life. Every mile we
+travel now is leading us on to the hotter regions of Venus, where that
+terrible sun will of necessity climb higher and higher into the sky and
+pour down more and more torrid rays. But we must face it.”
+
+On they went at ever-increasing speed, for, over the level surface of
+the sea, there was no need to slacken. The solitude was appalling, not
+a sail anywhere, only a few flying-fishes, and, far up in the air, near
+to the fleecy belts of clouds, whirling flights of birds too remote to
+be properly studied. And still the sun rose higher and higher, till he
+would soon be overhead, yet the heat did not increase to any degree
+that might have been expected. But the clouds increased till they
+formed a dazzling silvery canopy moderating rather than concealing the
+light of the sun; moreover, as Carysfort pointed out, they were cutting
+the air at such tremendous speed that the exhilarating contact with the
+atmosphere would of itself render the increase of temperature bearable.
+
+Several hours passed away amid strained attention and snatches of talk.
+
+“Surely, Professor,” said Abercromby, “when we got our peep at
+the lighted side of Venus we caught a glimpse of a large southern
+continent, and also of a whitish-looking point at the southern pole.”
+
+“Our glimpse was more tantalising than instructive,” he answered, “and
+my mind was so taken up with the perils of the steering that I did not
+use my telescope as frequently as I ought.”
+
+“I read in a book which I brought with me,” said Radcliffe, “that the
+southern horn of the crescent, that is, the south pole of Venus, is
+constantly to be seen blunted, as though some lofty mountain existed
+there which caught the solar rays, and it has been said that this may
+be even twenty-seven earth miles in height.”
+
+“I know to what you allude,” replied Carmichael. “As far back as 1643
+irregularities on the planet’s surface (when it appeared as a crescent)
+were noted by Fontana at Naples. Since then astronomers of several
+European countries have seen the same thing. Van Ertborn, a Belgian,
+in 1876, saw more than once a point of light in the neighbourhood of
+the southern pole, which he thought to be the sunshine striking a high
+peak, while the valleys around lay in shadow.”
+
+“As to the enormous height ascribed to the mountain,” observed
+Carysfort, “there is no doubt some error and perhaps a gross
+exaggeration, but, if there be any corresponding reality at all, we
+may look out for something inexpressibly grand when we approach the
+southern pole. I see here an advantage and a drawback: it will be the
+means of enabling us to behold our own earth, which, of course, is
+perpetually hidden from the inner side of the planet; but on the other
+hand, who but some Robinson Crusoe, monarch of all he surveys, could
+live on the top of a mountain of such proportions? I fear this weighs
+heavily in the scale against our finding human beings.”
+
+“I never realised I was an ungrateful beggar till this moment,” said
+Abercromby, “but I have positively forgotten that such a planet as
+the earth exists. I wonder I did so, as my generous uncle is upon its
+surface now, thinking me out in Australia, or else gone to the dogs;
+anyway, he is blessing his stars that he got rid of me with so little
+fuss. You managed it admirably, Professor. No luckless wastrel ever
+dropped out more neatly than I did; I might have cheated even the
+police.”
+
+“We all got off with very little trouble,” said Carysfort. “Had we been
+Frenchmen or Germans it would have been harder, but England permits any
+of her sons to vanish quietly, except Tommy Atkins of course, and _him_
+she usually allows to starve.”
+
+“Well, well, we are in Venus now and we need not bother over our
+poor stupid world,” said Abercromby; “besides, we are going back to
+enlighten it, you know.”
+
+“Land ahead, and not an island this time,” cried Radcliffe; and,
+behold, a vast range of lofty mountains could be discerned, about fifty
+miles away, showing clearly against a bank of clouds.
+
+“Well done, old chap,” replied Abercromby. “While we were rating the
+old world, you, like George Canning, have called into existence a new
+world to redress its balance.”
+
+“And what are we going to find upon yonder continent when we get
+there?” asked the Professor.
+
+“Women and men, angels and devils,” replied Frank in an elevated tone.
+“Which are which you, Radcliffe, shall decide. I’m going below to fetch
+a new telescope. That beast I had to fight has, I believe, swallowed my
+old one. I forgot that when Carysfort slew him I might have recovered
+the instrument, but it would take time to go back across the equator
+and fetch it.”
+
+The speed of the Asteroid had again to be greatly reduced, and a long
+interval elapsed ere they reached the summits of the mountains, which
+formed the outer edge of a vast and dreary plateau destitute of every
+species of life, animal or vegetable.
+
+As there was no need for them to make a home upon these bleak uplands,
+they held on upon their southern track. For many miles they saw this
+desert region beneath them, with its sombre-hued pinnacles and rock
+masses and its dull red areas of comparatively level ground. But at
+last their perseverance was to be rewarded. Gradually the nature of the
+soil changed from utter barrenness to richness, though for a long while
+the richness was but comparative rather than absolute. Trees began to
+appear, at first singly, then in groups, and finally in dense masses
+of brilliantly tinted woodland; the ground sloped downwards, though
+by no such abrupt transition as had been the case in the northern
+island. Presently the country began to open out, and, by degrees,
+one of the grandest landscapes upon which mortal eyes had ever looked
+became unveiled to view--a fertile and fruitful continent with majestic
+streams and smaller lakes, grand waterfalls and undulating hills. One
+thing alone was wanting--the presence of humanity. Another and a still
+higher mountain-chain with serrated peaks rose to the south, but it
+must have been at least two hundred miles distant. Beyond them, at all
+events, the final problem lay, for the whole contour of the landscape
+negatived the idea that mountains of such elevation could be instantly
+succeeded by the ocean without any intervening belt of land.
+
+“What do you think of it, Professor?” said the engineer.
+
+“It is just the northern island over again, except on a grander scale,”
+replied Carmichael. “I begin to realise that our stay in Venus will be
+very short. When we have once reached the pole and proved whether the
+high polar mountain is a myth or a reality the game will be up.”
+
+“But surely,” interposed Radcliffe, “the question cannot be settled
+by travelling in a straight line north to south. Ought we not to go
+_round_ the lighted side of the planet as well as going _down_ it?”
+
+“Certainly we ought,” answered Carmichael, “if this were only a vessel
+or an airship; but with our resources at command it will be much
+easier, and also safer, to rise to such a height as will embrace the
+whole hemisphere, and then, when it lies as a model map beneath us,
+to find out whether there is any further land, and drop down straight
+towards it.”
+
+“Pity, perhaps, we did not do this at the first,” said Abercromby. “We
+should then have saved ourselves a few disappointments at least.”
+
+“No,” answered the Professor. “I will put up with the disappointments.
+It was very desirable to come to close quarters with the soil and the
+products of Venus.”
+
+“Well, here seems a suitable spot for an anchorage,” said Carysfort,
+pointing to a sequestered glade near the banks of a large river;
+“suppose we fix upon it and settle ourselves.”
+
+The Asteroid glided down till it rested upon a grassy mound at an
+elevation of about thirty feet above the river bank. The usual
+precautions to ensure the safety of the machine were then taken, and
+while Jackson prepared the tea, the rest stood watching the rapid
+current as it sped past them in a south-westerly direction.
+
+They were so dead-tired that tea and supper were blended into one, and
+then Abercromby having undertaken to mount guard, the others gladly
+succumbed to their drowsiness and fell asleep.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER X
+
+ WHEN THE RAIN MIST LIFTED
+
+
+The Professor had just rubbed his eyes in the first moments of waking
+consciousness, when he heard a yell resound through the machine,
+but of an unmistakably earthly type. The next moment he had sprung
+to his feet, thrust on an overcoat, and was up the stairs into the
+dining-room. Carysfort and the others had emerged with equal speed;
+Jackson, indeed, with more zeal than conventionality, appeared in his
+night-shirt.
+
+Abercromby was standing, ghastly pale, his hair erect, every muscle and
+limb shaking, and pointing to the window. A huge, man-like creature,
+with reeking jaws, porcupine-like bristles, and one enormous eye in the
+middle of his forehead, had clambered up the stairway and was tearing
+at the smooth surface of the glass with claw-like hands. With a cry of
+horror Carysfort rushed to fetch his gun, but, finding the way to the
+stair-ladder barred, he stopped and hesitated. As if to make matters
+worse, two other creatures, equally hideous and furious, flung out
+their arms and sought to clasp the Asteroid in their foul clutches.
+Carmichael at once made for the conning-tower and started the machine
+in an upward flight. The irons tore and creaked, but of course gave
+way after a minute, while the Asteroid rose over the tree tops, a
+hundred feet from the ground. With a hideous yell the gorilla creatures
+let go and were hurled downwards, not to the ground but into the waters
+of the river. They evidently had no idea of swimming, for, after a
+brief struggle, they were swept away by the current.
+
+“A pretty appetiser we have had for breakfast,” grumbled Frank
+Abercromby. “Darwin’s missing link was not in it.”
+
+“How on earth did the monsters first appear?” asked Carysfort.
+
+“My friend, you must say in future ‘How on Venus,’” replied Abercromby.
+“Well, I had better cry ‘peccavi,’ as the Indian governor did when he
+wrote ‘I have Scinde.’ I was just going to fall asleep at my post, when
+that strange and most attractive Johnnie came and looked reproachfully
+at me. But I wonder I did not go stark staring mad on the spot.”
+
+“Where are we to venture the machine now?” asked Radcliffe, who looked
+very white though he had said nothing.
+
+“We will keep this side of the river at all events,” said the
+Professor. They chose another less restricted camping-place, the
+anchors were made fast, and the party alighted to be quite certain the
+coast was clear. Radcliffe declared that he heard certain gobblings and
+chucklings emanating from the thickets hard by, and the others, after
+attentively listening, believed he was right. They resolved, therefore,
+to make but a very short stay, in fact, only just sufficient to take
+their meal. Even Abercromby disclaimed the thought of an out-of-door
+picnic, and therefore they had breakfast in the dining-room and drew in
+the stair-ladder as a precaution.
+
+“What concerns me is the thought that those creatures are the real
+inhabitants of Venus,” remarked Carysfort.
+
+“God forbid!” said Radcliffe fervently. “I cannot and will not think so
+until I am obliged.”
+
+“If _that_ is evolution illustrated,” remarked Abercromby, “it would
+have made Darwin himself orthodox.”
+
+“I am by no means disposed to reject evolution,” replied Radcliffe,
+“because the Creator could work in and through evolution, even if man
+be descended from a protoplasm as well as from a monkey. All I ask for
+is that God’s hand should guide the process all through the countless
+ages. Not that I consider Darwin’s theory proved. I only say that if it
+ever comes to be, it would not shake my faith.”
+
+“Don’t be too liberal and concessive, my dear fellow,” said the
+Professor, “though the advice may sound queer as coming from me.
+Evolution is _a_ theory, not _the_ theory. To make it account for all
+the facts of creation is to take up one of those short and easy cuts
+which are as great a nuisance to true science as to anything else. I
+regard evolution as one of the helpful working forces of the universe.
+I believe that the original types of animal life were fewer than the
+existing types. But when I have said that, I no more believe that all
+life came from a jelly-fish than I believe that every species was
+distinctly and separately created. People always think that nature is
+uniform in its ways, while we shall have to learn that it is not. As to
+the inhabitants of Venus being represented by those creatures, my mind
+turns sick at the very thought. However, we must face facts, but we
+will not rush at facts.”
+
+“No, I did not rush at the monster, I waited for fresh light on the
+situation, and you brought it me, Professor,” said Abercromby. “I
+should never be eating this breakfast had I taken a short and easy road
+to knowledge by going out and shaking hands with him.”
+
+“Well, I think we will start,” said the Professor, “when you have done
+eating, Abercromby.”
+
+“Yes; we will have a good day’s aerial exploration to blow the
+nightmare off,” remarked the engineer.
+
+They travelled at least a hundred miles over the fair and diversified
+land before they had accomplished more than half the distance to the
+southern mountains. Once Radcliffe declared that there were some houses
+perched upon an eminence to the west, but a careful survey proved that
+they were only high rocks of white colour shining in the sun’s rays
+above the forest land. As some doubt was still felt, they shaped their
+course towards them, for it did not take them many miles out of their
+way.
+
+It proved to be a tableland of grey-white rocks, several hundred feet
+above the plain. Here the Asteroid alighted and it was resolved to rest
+for the night, for the place appeared fairly inaccessible to wild
+beasts, and if any such were to appear, they could be easily seen
+before they touched the Asteroid. But there were no traces of wild
+beasts, though some richly plumed birds made the air melodious with
+their song for a few minutes. Jackson was preparing the supper, and all
+except Radcliffe were within. Radcliffe was out on the plateau, wrapped
+in his thoughts, as Abercromby told them, as well as in his greatcoat.
+
+“Well, I wish the dear fellow would not express them in that
+everlasting tune,” said the engineer; “he has been well on for a
+quarter of an hour, and it rather gets on my nerves.”
+
+“It is one of the melodies those fiddlers were playing at Cullercoats,”
+remarked the Professor, “‘Love launched a fairy boat,’ I believe.”
+
+“The prettiest song I ever heard, that, and ‘All in the hush of
+twilight,’” said Abercromby; “but alas and alack! there is no maiden to
+sing with me, though we are in the Love planet itself.”
+
+“No! that is quite true,” replied the Professor dryly.
+
+Radcliffe came in, happily unconscious of the late topic of criticism.
+
+They took their places at the supper-table, when one of the most
+startling interruptions that had ever yet tried their nerves broke in
+upon the meal.
+
+Overhead they heard a loud noise followed by a wailing cry. It seemed
+to come from the north, to attain to a piercing intensity, and then to
+die away southwards into tremulous silence.
+
+“What the deuce is that?” shouted Abercromby; and, before the others
+could stop him, he had opened the door, and, regardless of the absence
+of the steps, had bounded out upon the plateau. There they saw him
+throwing his arms to and fro, and wildly gesticulating to them the
+other side of the windows. They could see he was in no danger, but mad
+with eagerness and excitement.
+
+The whole party sprang to their feet and were by his side in two
+minutes. They looked in the direction in which he was wildly pointing,
+and saw a huge greyish thing, with outspread fans, whirling away to the
+mountain heights and then vanishing behind them.
+
+The Professor, after a moment’s dead silence, said: “This is very
+serious; let us come within.”
+
+“Why very serious?” asked the engineer, when they were again at the
+supper-table.
+
+“Because it means one of two things, either of which will greatly
+affect us. It is either a huge primeval monster, or a flying machine
+like our own, in so far as it is an airship.”
+
+“And why are either of these things so grave after all?” said
+Abercromby. “If that affair yonder were an airship, your heart ought to
+be glad, Professor; if a monster, it has the right to be sorry, your
+heart I mean; but why alarmed?”
+
+“If it be a monster, Abercromby, we have come to Venus too soon to
+find intelligent human life. Such creatures could hardly co-exist
+with man in a world which, for practical purposes, has but so little
+accommodation. If it be an airship, then we are going to meet a race
+incapable of being either terrified by us, or even much astonished
+by us, who can meet us on equal terms, man to man, but may be armed
+millions against armed units. Now you understand what I fear, and why I
+fear it.”
+
+“Take it easy, Professor, we may astonish the niggers after all; but
+I _must_ say I want to see them, even if it be only possible for them
+to astonish _me_. We will sing them a song or two before we die,
+Professor.”
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The night was far from being a restful one under such circumstances.
+Two were placed on guard, to relieve each other every three hours. On
+the next day they found it impossible to start, as a thin, penetrating
+rain descended, the first they had experienced upon Venus. It
+continued, without cessation, for several hours, while the whole valley
+lay enwrapped in a silvery mist. The Asteroid afforded them a secure
+asylum, but, in their state of eager excitement, the time passed very
+slowly.
+
+At last, soon after they had had their lunch, the mist began to
+disperse and the sun shone out in splendour. The air was much fresher
+and cooler; had they not been so naturally impatient to push on, they
+would have taken a walk, at least along the ridge of the plateau. But
+they were in no mood to do this--they were hunting for niggers, as
+Abercromby elegantly phrased it, and as nobody else overheard him, it
+did not much matter.
+
+The Professor ordered the start at about 3 p.m. by their watches. The
+Asteroid was set at fairly high speed, and soon reached the slopes of
+the mountains. A few miles to the west they saw a huge gap or defile,
+and towards this they steered. A great wall of precipitous rock shelved
+downwards in the direction in which they had come, but, to the south, a
+pass extended of varying breadth, sometimes almost too narrow for the
+whole of them to walk abreast.
+
+The Asteroid was therefore in a rather awkward position; they could
+descend if they liked and make the journey on foot, but, in such a
+place, it seemed too hazardous to deprive themselves of the aid of
+their machine. They decided therefore to rise higher, and to follow
+the course of the pass, but at a safe elevation above it. In a few
+minutes the pass ended, they came out over a grassy upland height, but,
+unfortunately, the rain mist had now taken up its position to the south
+of them, and though there was evidently a grand landscape prospect, it
+was, for the present, completely wiped out.
+
+A clump of lofty trees reared their heads a few hundred yards away, and
+to these they steered, coming to an anchorage beneath them. The party
+gladly took shelter in the dining-room, for they began to be positively
+chilly, doubtless owing to the peculiar state of the atmosphere,
+perhaps, even, to their restless nerves.
+
+Neither cold nor rain could deter Clarence Radcliffe from venturing
+to the end of the clump of trees where the ground sloped suddenly
+downwards. He saw the mist begin to uncoil and lift itself; slowly
+the outlines grew clearer and more distinct. Feature after feature of
+a country, rich in its loveliness, disclosed themselves. High hills
+were interspersed with park-like glades; a lake of superb dimensions
+appeared, glittering in the sunshine, into which two majestic rivers
+poured their rapid waters. In the midst was a large island, and in the
+centre rose an object that sent the blood tingling through his veins--a
+colossal palace fortress or temple, with four graceful pinnacles each
+glittering with a different hue of colour--while beyond the lake was a
+greater sight still, at which, after a glance of fascinated admiration,
+he turned away, his eyes dim with tears. “O that one had been here to
+see it with me, but it was not to be. Her eyes behold a landscape with
+which even this cannot compare. If I could but know she was looking at
+me now, I should be more brave to do what perhaps lies before me. But I
+know she would wish me to do it, and I _will_.”
+
+Then he turned and went back to the Asteroid. They were all in the
+dining-room making preparations to start for a walk, as the weather was
+clearing. But all stood petrified at the expression on his face.
+
+“Gentlemen,” he said, “I have chanced to see what you should all have
+seen with me. I owe you an apology. Come at once.”
+
+They rushed out to the edge of the great precipice and stopped,
+absolutely incapable for the moment either of speech or action. The
+vast plain was dotted with houses and palaces, each standing in its
+grove and garden, while up the sides of the two southern hills that
+sloped towards the lake shore stretched the outlines of a great city,
+its domes, towers, and pinnacles shining in the light of a sun more
+splendid than the sun of India, yet tempered in its rays by the
+white-robed circle of the sky.
+
+The object of the expedition was accomplished; before them lay the
+life, the civilisation, and the glory of the planet Venus.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XI
+
+ THE CITY AND ITS WELCOME
+
+
+“My friends,” began Carmichael in an almost trembling voice, “there
+is no need for me to tell you that the supreme hour has come at last.
+All that we have dared and anything we may have suffered has led up
+to this, and we may put it behind us. Before us now lies the solemn
+duty of doing the right thing for two worlds and so acting that we
+shall not make our return home impossible, for if we do we only
+benefit ourselves. Now the first thing to face is the initial peril,
+the greatest as well as the nearest. A glance suffices to show us
+that force is out of the question, and that we cannot play the part
+of demi-gods even if we wished to. How, then, shall we best and most
+wisely disclose ourselves to those people, who of course cannot speak a
+word of any language with which we are familiar, whose manners are as
+unknown to us as their weapons, and who may even have totally different
+ideas as to both justice and mercy from any terrestrial races.”
+
+“You state a big problem, Professor,” replied Carysfort, “but I think
+it will conduce to simplify it if we decide first of all whether we
+shall boldly venture into their midst or approach them in deferential
+guise.”
+
+“Stick to our good old machine, that is my advice,” said Abercromby;
+“if they have artillery or other contrivances to blow us up they can
+the more easily destroy us piecemeal if we take a walking tour and
+present ourselves as solitary wayfarers.”
+
+“That cannot be thought of,” said Carmichael. “The choice lies between
+soaring towards the city in the air, or pitching quite near to it and
+keeping close to the Asteroid.”
+
+“A thought occurs to me,” said Radcliffe, “that it might not be a bad
+plan to entrench ourselves where we are, but not to leave them to find
+us out, which would be cowardice, but to signal to them and make them
+send a deputation to us. This would force them to show whether they
+meant to be friendly or hostile.”
+
+“Excellent, capital!” said Frank Abercromby. “But what signals do you
+propose?”
+
+“The rockets,” answered Radcliffe.
+
+“I think the idea is feasible and also wise,” said the Professor
+thoughtfully. “Its chief merit lies in this, that but a small number
+can come to us in this elevated place, whereas if we went to the city
+we should have the whole multitude upon our hands. The going to the
+city or encamping near to it might well suggest to them hostilities,
+whereas our signalling to them could not be regarded in such a light.”
+
+The decision having been taken, it only remained for them to put it
+into execution, and this they resolved to do at once. Having seen
+to their arms and ammunition, the rocket apparatus was placed in
+readiness, and the first rocket was discharged by the Professor. It
+rose into the sky with a loud explosion, and the fiery train must have
+been visible to every part of the city. A few minutes later a second
+rocket was discharged and after that a third.
+
+“These must suffice,” said he; “we must not waste our supply.”
+
+Some little time elapsed during which the party closely examined every
+part of the scene before them with the help of their telescopes. They
+were too far off to make out the inhabitants, but they could gain clear
+information as to the houses. The architecture was somewhat Oriental in
+character, though Radcliffe thought that it bore a resemblance to the
+accounts given of ancient Mexico and Peru in the histories of Prescott.
+There were broad streets and squares with fountains and gardens in the
+midst; the larger houses were of very imposing aspect. There seemed no
+evidence of squalor or poverty anywhere, but of affluence and repose.
+In fact, _repose_ was one of the prevailing features.
+
+It was a veritable garden city or pleasure city; there was neither
+hurry nor tumult. They noted also an utter absence of fortification or
+military defence. Either the Venusians had no enemies on their planet
+who could molest them, or they had concealed weapons and resources that
+rendered visible precautions needless.
+
+Suddenly they all noticed a small object rise up like a bird upon the
+wing from the terrace of a huge palace on the top of the highest hill.
+It was evidently coming towards them, and that rapidly.
+
+“An airship I declare,” cried Abercromby. “That, then, was the object
+that gave us such a fright the other evening.”
+
+The flying vessel came nearer and nearer; it was more graceful and
+ethereal than the Asteroid, though the machinery by which it was
+propelled was much the same in character. It had no outer balcony, nor
+did it seem to carry any weapons. It slowed down within a few yards
+of them, and then a click was heard, a panelled door flew open, and
+two beings alighted, evidently a man and a woman. They were about
+the same height as average terrestrials; they had a pale complexion
+with a slight yellowish tinge; their dress was simple, a flowing
+classical-like drapery with a girdle of crimson. They wore upon their
+heads tiaras of gold, while the woman’s head was adorned with a
+coronet. Each carried in the hand a small tube of green-coloured metal.
+
+Carmichael, motioning to the others to stand back, while keeping his
+hand upon his revolver in case of need, stepped forward, bowing and
+smiling, and making every demonstration of peace and goodwill. The two
+Venusians did not reciprocate his advances; their whole bearing was
+haughty and aloof.
+
+The Professor spoke a few words, and tried the expedient of leading
+forward each of his companions and presenting them.
+
+The strangers conversed rapidly with each other in a very musical and
+harmonious language. The man was rather eager and excited, the woman
+haughty and stern. Suddenly she raised the tube in her hand and pointed
+it at the Professor.
+
+Radcliffe sprang forward and interposed to shield him, guessing the
+deadly intent. At this she lowered the weapon and said a few words to
+her companion. He nodded, and she pointed the green metal tube not at
+them but at a tall tree a little to the right; a faint flash followed,
+and suddenly the tree stood blasted before them as by a stroke of
+lightning. A cry broke from the party and all drew their revolvers; but
+Radcliffe spoke an earnest word and, taking his own weapon, he laid it
+upon the ground. This was understood, and the two Venusians replaced
+their metal tubes in their girdles.
+
+They paused a moment, then they made signs to Radcliffe to approach
+them. The man took the hand he stretched out and grasped it; the
+woman would not, but her lips parted into the semblance of a smile
+which at least denoted a relaxing of enmity. Struck by a thought, the
+Professor hurried to fetch a large map of the solar system with all the
+planets and their orbits clearly marked. Radcliffe held this out to
+the Venusians, who took it and examined it with the greatest interest,
+making frequent comments one to the other.
+
+Abercromby, who would have made his fortune on the stage, then went
+through a pantomimic performance to describe the purpose of the
+expedition and the course which it had taken. The Venusians looked on,
+till the man grew impatient and the woman more and more scornful.
+
+Suddenly Radcliffe pointed to the map, and described with his pencil
+the journey of the Asteroid from the earth to Venus. He took a sheet
+of white paper and drew sketches of Venus as a planet and of the
+Asteroid approaching her. The Venusians were now intensely interested,
+and even pressed him by signs to tell them more. He went on for another
+quarter of an hour, till they signified that they had heard enough.
+They did not condescend to take further notice of the others, but shook
+hands with him, this time both of them, pointed once and again in the
+direction of their city, stepped into their machine, and instantly took
+to flight, returning in the same direction as that in which they had
+come.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+“A queer business this,” said Abercromby. “You were evidently in high
+esteem, Radcliffe, old man; that amiable female meant to put daylight
+through us, as the Americans say, if you had not curried favour.”
+
+“Abercromby, don’t be jealous,” said Carysfort; “some other Venusian
+maid will fall in love with you if you have a little patience and do
+not expect to take a whole planet by storm.”
+
+“I’m not a bit jealous,” said Abercromby, “only Radcliffe captivated
+both the jokers, and did not leave us even the man.”
+
+“Well, he saved all our lives, except at the expense of a deed which
+would have aroused the whole world against us,” replied the Professor.
+“But we must now decide, and quickly, upon what is to be done next.”
+
+“Follow them to the city, as they pointed the way to it,” said
+Radcliffe.
+
+“I think we had better do so,” answered Carmichael; “their gestures
+certainly wore the aspect of invitation, if not of command.”
+
+“I scarcely think we are very sure of a friendly reception,” observed
+the engineer, “and yet if we stay here, they will hunt us out, or
+capture us by main force.”
+
+“Where is Jackson?” asked Carmichael.
+
+“Down in the store-room,” said Abercromby sarcastically. “When the
+Venusians got ready their shots he bethought himself that the kettle
+wanted watching. My old grandfather, who used to dine on board ship
+with Charlie Napier and the other paladins of the ‘roaring fifties,’
+once heard a naval captain tell a story of how a black cook ran down
+into the stoke-hole as soon as the French or the Russians commenced
+firing. Well, the officer hauled him up on deck and rated him for a
+cowardly rascal. The nigger was equal to the occasion. ‘Good heart,
+massa!’ he said; ‘good heart! bad legs, massa, bad legs! Legs run away
+with the heart!’”
+
+Carmichael laughed, and then the whole party got inside the Asteroid,
+and the engines being set in motion, they rose high into the air and
+winged a straight flight to the great city.
+
+As a measure of prudence, the Professor raised the altitude of the
+Asteroid a mile above the ground, and shaped his course for the
+terraced building on the hill. They could see vast multitudes pouring
+out of the houses and standing, pointing with upraised arms to the
+machine, and watching intently its every movement.
+
+At last the great palace lay below them, and they slowly descended till
+they alighted upon the ground in the courtyard. Hardly had they done so
+when excited crowds of men and women came rushing forth.
+
+In a moment, before the travellers had had time to give explanations
+by signs, they were seized by furious hands, their weapons struck
+from them, and they would soon have been torn in pieces had not two
+officials, in gorgeous attire, thrust their way forward and spoken
+some words in a high and authoritative tone. Then the crowd fell back,
+still uttering such cries of rage and fury that they expected each
+moment would be their last. But the officers of the court kept their
+authority, and Carmichael, Carysfort, Abercromby, and Radcliffe were
+led into an adjoining room, where their hands were tightly bound, and
+they were bidden to follow. They were then dragged along a number
+of passages till they arrived at last before a door which, on being
+opened, led into a small quadrangle open to the sky, with a few shrubs
+and flowers growing in the centre, and several rooms opening into it,
+one large, the others small. Then the officers released them from their
+fetters and immediately departed.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The first thing the ill-fated travellers did when the door closed upon
+them was to count their numbers, and then they made the startling
+discovery that there was one missing.
+
+“Where is Jackson?” asked the Professor, in a transport of alarm.
+
+“Don’t trouble about him,” said Carysfort; “he is safe in the machine.”
+
+“Good heavens! How came we to leave him?” said the Professor.
+
+“He is better off than we are,” remarked Carysfort; “he has the means
+of escape, while we are trapped.”
+
+“I suppose the next event will be the lord high executioner,” muttered
+Abercromby. “Why were we such idiots as not to stick to the Asteroid?”
+
+“Well, it is done now,” replied Carmichael; “but remember that with
+their weapons, of which we have had a sample already, they could have
+not only destroyed us but wrecked the Asteroid as well. A mob hammering
+at the windows could soon have effected an entrance. But if I _did_
+lose my head for a minute, I can only ask your forgiveness. As to poor
+Jackson, he is free to do what we did not or could not do, and I think
+he will have had sense enough to get away and loyalty enough not to go
+away altogether. Anyway, God alone can protect us now.”
+
+“I, who have the least interest in living,” said Radcliffe, “beg you
+all not to give up hope. Just consider, even if the Venusians had come
+down upon London and smashed the dome of St. Paul’s, English justice
+would not kill them without full enquiry, and all the scientists in
+the world would clamour for their lives to learn what secrets they had
+to tell. So it will be with us, depend upon it; we shall be allowed
+to live, though I fear we shall never be allowed to return. For your
+sakes, and for the world’s sake, I am deeply sorry, though personally
+I would prefer to live here till the call comes to go where the wicked
+cease from troubling and where the weary are at rest.”
+
+Abercromby was just about to expatiate on the better prospects they
+might have had in Mars when the door opened, and some men appeared
+bearing food and drink upon a large platter. This done, they retired,
+without a word, though it would have been of little use to have
+attempted conversation.
+
+“I believe we shall be kept alive till we have learned their blessed
+language,” muttered Abercromby; “and we had better assume at once that
+it takes as long to learn it as Chinese. Meantime we can grow fat at
+the Government expense. I wonder who bosses the show here, whether
+king, queen, president, or council of elders. Also whether Free-trade
+or Protection is in the ascendant?”
+
+But poor Abercromby’s jokes fell very flat upon the weary and
+dispirited men, who ate their meal and then stretched themselves upon
+the none too luxurious couches provided for them and fell asleep,
+wishing they could wake up to hear the waves beat upon Northumbria’s
+shore in their Cullercoats lodging or in the lonely house at Newbiggin.
+
+Two days passed in the same miserable uncertainty. Three times during
+each day they were waited on by silent attendants; their food was of
+the nature of dough cakes, and their drink was of a light kind of
+fruity wine, very palatable but somewhat disposed to bring on a state
+of drowsiness if they partook too freely of it.
+
+They were at full liberty to promenade the courtyard, and to wander in
+and out of the adjoining rooms. They scarcely ever caught sounds from
+the outside world, except, now and again, the singing of birds.
+
+But one day, just after they had risen, they heard Abercromby calling
+them from the parlour or dining-room in tones hoarse with excitement.
+He was holding in his hand a number of sheets of paper.
+
+“Come here, all of you, and solve this riddle for me. I want you to
+prove to my own private satisfaction that I am neither mad nor drunk.”
+
+“What have you got there?” said Carysfort. “Why! bless my stars! this
+is some of our manuscript paper from the Asteroid. Where did you find
+it?”
+
+“On the table here, staring me in the face.”
+
+The Professor took up the sheets, scanned them very carefully, and then
+said, “This is an alphabet of the Venusian language, and here are lists
+of Venusian words and phrases. Now we see that Radcliffe’s theory is
+quite correct. This is our first lesson in the language, and it will
+no doubt be followed by many others. It is clear now that our lives
+are safe, till we are able to render a complete account of our unlucky
+selves, and perhaps afterwards, if we give satisfaction.”
+
+“That is all very well so far as it goes, Professor,” replied
+Abercromby, “and it is a great convenience and a skilful piece of work.
+But one thing seems for a moment to have escaped your notice.”
+
+“What is that?” asked Carmichael quickly.
+
+“Where the dickens does the English come from and who holds the chair
+of terrestrial languages in this planet’s university?”
+
+“Forgive me, Abercromby; for the moment I was so taken up with the
+personal aspect of this discovery that I forgot the more amazing side
+of it. Now am I utterly thunderstruck, and have not a word to say.”
+
+“Of all the things that have befallen us since we left the earth this
+transcends every one of them,” replied the engineer.
+
+Radcliffe ventured the remark that the Venusians must have taken
+possession of the Asteroid and stolen the paper, or else poor Jackson
+must have been compelled to give it up.
+
+The Professor admitted that this was quite possible, but it did not
+elucidate the amazing problem of how English could be known in Venus.
+
+The Professor sat with his head buried in his hands. Radcliffe took up
+the paper and scrutinised each of the English words.
+
+“There are but three suppositions,” remarked Carmichael at length.
+“One, that some Englishman or American has forestalled us. This, I
+think, is absurd; the very attitude of the people is opposed to it.
+Another, that the Venusians possess powers unknown to man and can
+master other forms of speech at will. But, if that were so, they
+might talk to us at once. There is one theory more--pure and absolute
+miracle--the act of God. On this I am too reverent by nature to offer
+any criticism. I confess myself to have received as astounding a shock
+to my intellect as our casualty has dealt to our liberty and our hopes.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XII
+
+ NEEDFUL PREPARATIONS
+
+
+As they had all suspected, a change soon came over the situation; they
+had a task set them to do, and this was to learn the language of the
+country.
+
+Every day both men and women came to their prison to give them
+instructions, which they carried on by signs, by pictures, by every
+conceivable method. They submitted with the best grace they could,
+although they could not tell to what this education process was
+destined to lead, whether to life or to death. Carmichael was at a
+disadvantage, for he had never developed an aptitude for learning
+languages, and it was said that he had got through his “Little Go” at
+Cambridge with considerable difficulty, as his laurels were gained
+in another field. The engineer was a man of many tongues, as he had
+travelled much, both in Mexico and South America. Abercromby always
+spoke of himself as a hopeless dunce, but it was often noticed that
+he found the way to learn whatever he really wished to learn. As to
+Clarence Radcliffe, he threw his whole soul into the work--a process
+which on this occasion stood him in good stead, as, in ordinary cases,
+languages were not his strong point.
+
+The mystery of the English writing was not solved. Radcliffe persisted
+in thinking that the two people who had visited them on the hillside
+were the authors of it. There was some plausibility in this, for they
+may have meant it as a return for the trouble he had taken with them
+over the diagrams and the solar-system map. But plausible as the
+suggested motive might be, it did not explain how they could have
+carried it out.
+
+When a little progress had been made Carmichael one day showed the
+papers to some who had come to teach them. He was surprised to find
+that they evinced little or no curiosity or astonishment. The reason,
+however, soon appeared. They thought that the prisoners had written the
+words for themselves, and it was the presence of their own words, not
+of the English words, that they specially noted. When the Professor
+understood this, Carysfort earnestly advised him to let the matter
+drop, for in their helpless position indiscreet disclosures or even
+questions might get them all into trouble. They would soon find out
+for themselves what powers the wise men of the planet really had.
+“Besides,” he said, “I am convinced by a minute study of the letters
+that they were never written by one to whom our language was familiar;
+their shape is quite stilted and foreign.”
+
+Carmichael was satisfied now that they had not been forestalled by some
+traveller from earth.
+
+They early made discovery of the name by which Venus was known to its
+own people. Venusian was not a pleasing term, and did not sound so
+well as Atalantan. The planet was called Atalanta, which meant “the
+flowery land.” As there was but one nation, one empire, dwelling upon
+it, Atalanta was the name given to both the country and its metropolis.
+The beautiful vale in which the city stood with the great lake from
+whose shores its steep ascents took their rise was Meloria; the broad
+spreading high hills bounding the vale to the north were the Keraunian
+Mountains, so called from an ancient king of Atalanta who had saved the
+life of the child of one of the noblest of his subjects, while climbing
+their heights, at the expense of his own.
+
+Carmichael was told that his supposition of a high mountain near the
+southern pole was correct. It was a peaked mountain called Aptaura, and
+was twenty miles above the sea-level, the highest point on the planet.
+
+The earth was known to the Atalantans as Karamandra, “Queen of the cold
+night”; Mercury, which was the only planet visible from the lighted
+hemisphere, was called Araminta, the bright flashing; while the sun
+was Asti, the furnace, though he had other titles connected with the
+Atalantan religion.
+
+Carmichael saw that it was useless to seek any information as to what
+was going to happen to them, nor would his teachers tell much about
+their politics or customs. The travellers even suspected that any
+questions they put were noted down. Radcliffe got on the best, as he
+only made enquiries about their beliefs, and on this point they were
+willing, as far as he was concerned, to be a little more communicative,
+though it is to be feared that he was not greatly encouraged by what
+they told him.
+
+On the other hand, the Atalantans put very few questions themselves
+and these only of a harmless sort. It was evident that they had no
+intention of treachery, but how much of what the travellers said was
+reported elsewhere, the latter could not be equally certain.
+
+One evening the party were seated in their parlour, when Abercromby
+asked the Professor to tell them what he had been able to glean as to
+Atalantan matters.
+
+“Well,” replied Carmichael, “my supply of talk is but scanty, but it
+may while away the time to piece it together. I have ascertained that
+there exists no variety of race upon the planet; that these people
+have been settled here for a couple of thousand years at least; that
+they are descended from a pair, pretty much after the Bible account of
+Adam and Eve, only much more recent in time; that they were originally
+patriarchal in government, but that gradually the kingly power grew and
+grew until it became what it is now, a sort of benevolent autocracy
+rather resembling that of the ancient Incas of Peru. The growth of the
+race has been exceedingly slow compared with that of earthly races, but
+I have an opinion that this is largely due to the deliberate will of
+the people themselves, who know that they have but a small available
+territory for the comfortable support of life in a civilised form.
+Towns and cities do not exist, nor distinct villages. There is but
+the giant capital and scattered and independent country houses. There
+is an extension of the land southwards forming a peninsula called
+Anactorium; the land then ends near the south pole with the giant
+mountain Aptaura, on which is situated an observatory for the study of
+the heavenly bodies, our earth included.
+
+“Off the south-western coast is a large island called Melandria
+inhabited by a somewhat more hardy population, of which island the
+princess Melanitis is said to be very fond.
+
+“Now, Carysfort, you take up the cudgels, and tell us what your supply
+of knowledge is.”
+
+“Not very much,” muttered the engineer. “These folk have found out how
+to steer airships about two hundred years ago, and it seems they use
+them for all purposes of travel. This is why, except in Melandria,
+there are few roads and fewer vehicles. Before the airship came in
+they used palanquins and litter-travelling for the aristocracy, while
+the rest of the people walked. The aristocracy consist of those only
+who have done deeds of kindness or valour, such as the Royal House may
+think worthy of wearing the crimson sash, the tiara, and the coronet;
+their children inherit their honours till they do anything disgraceful
+and then the title lapses.
+
+“Sir Thomas More and Gulliver ought to have lived in this land before
+writing their terrestrial books.”
+
+“How are the people fed?” asked Radcliffe.
+
+“Everybody grows his own produce and makes his own furniture and
+clothes,” said Carysfort. “All the central and northern lands are the
+free property of the state. Anybody can take what he wants if he has
+the energy to go there. If he has not, then he must have a poorer
+house and wear shabbier clothes.”
+
+“How do they elect the king?”
+
+“The crown descends from sire to son, or from sire to daughter, for
+one hundred years, then the nobility meet in conclave and elect the
+worthiest man or woman of their number. If they cannot agree, the
+reigning sovereign may hold the throne till death; but this has only
+happened twice.”
+
+“Now, Abercromby, tell us your discoveries,” said Carmichael.
+
+“The king has two daughters, Melanitis and Mexitli,” he answered; “the
+former will be queen on her father’s death, and he is a very old man.
+
+“I am afraid after all, Professor, you are much to be commiserated
+that you did not go to Mars. It is a feminine world, Professor, in the
+worst of all senses, that men appear to be in a position of distinct
+inferiority. They do all the work, and what the others do I have not
+clearly learned at present, but when I know I will tell you. So far as
+I can find out, their rule is decently benevolent, but I shudder to
+think of the exceptions. I suppose it will all figure out right; if it
+doesn’t we shan’t be here to see.”
+
+“I believe you are humbugging,” laughed Carmichael.
+
+“I will tell you a pathetic story,” continued Abercromby. “I happened
+to ask one of the most recent damsels who came here to complete my
+studies if the princesses were good-looking. She got in such a rage
+that I asked her what the dickens she meant by it. As she failed to
+understand me, my words soothed her, and then with the airs of all
+the queens from Semiramis to Victoria, she demanded by what right a
+Karamandran barbarian from outer space presumed to ask such a thing
+respecting the two fairy pillars upon which Atalanta would one day
+rest. She told me I was only fit to herd with mangas, and I told her
+she was enough to make a cat laugh like Charlie’s Aunt, but I spoke in
+English, of course.”
+
+“What is a manga?” asked Radcliffe.
+
+“I fear it is one of those dear monkeys that made me howl and wake the
+Professor, but I am not sure.
+
+“I think we will agree not to ask Radcliffe what he has found out, for
+we are hardly in a fit mood for serious talk, and I don’t think he
+wants to tell us,” continued Abercromby.
+
+“No, not to-night,” said Radcliffe. “I told Frank that I was afraid
+they worshipped the sun, and he consoled me by saying they would not
+think of worshipping the moon, because Venus had not got one.”
+
+As Radcliffe himself laughed the whole party saw no harm in doing the
+same.
+
+Three days later a most remarkable event occurred. This was nothing
+less than the arrival of Jackson, with his hands fettered, it is true,
+but the guards told them they might release him at once.
+
+“Well, Tom, old friend and comrade, I am glad to see you,” said
+Carmichael warmly.
+
+“More glad than I am to see myself,” answered Jackson. “I don’t know
+how I can bear to tell you all that has happened.”
+
+“It was not your fault,” said his master kindly. “Let us hear the
+worst at once--the machine has been taken away or destroyed.”
+
+“Not so bad as all that, sir; it is put under lock and key and strongly
+guarded. When I saw you made prisoner I thought I would set the engines
+going, soar up, and play a game in the sky which would frighten them,
+but I never got the chance; they swarmed in, knocked me down, after I
+had sent some of them down, bound me hands and feet, and fastened me
+to one of the couches in the dining-room. Then they began poking their
+blessed noses into every nook and corner, and there I was swearing and
+cussing and not able to do nothing to stop them.
+
+“Presently they takes me and opens my mouth and puts something in that
+sends me straight off asleep for the next twenty hours. When I wakes up
+some low-looking fellows were standing over me and feeling me about,
+and I put out my tongue in case it was a doctor. Well, they brought me
+food and drink, and I was that mad hungry and thirsty I cleared the
+plate and mug, I can tell you, and then off I went to sleep again, and
+this was pretty much how I was treated till this morning, when they
+took me out of the machine and brought me to you. They had moved the
+machine with me in it while I was unconscious.”
+
+“Did they teach you to speak their language?” asked the Professor.
+
+“Not they, sir. They didn’t think me up to it, I suppose.”
+
+“Well, they have taken no end of pains to teach us,” said Abercromby,
+and he told Jackson the extraordinary incident of the English words.
+
+“I believe I can make that out, sir,” said Jackson.
+
+The Professor looked amazed, but he only said, “If you can, Tom, you
+will take quite a load off my brains.”
+
+“It was one of their monkey tricks they played on me, depend on it,
+sir. When I got my senses back, I saw one of the rascals holding
+sheets of our manuscript paper in his hand. I believe he just went and
+mesmerised me, and got me to say and do all he wanted. Of course, if
+they were after teaching you their lingo, they would start much the
+quicker by helping you to put their work into our letters, and I am
+sure that was how they did it; they made me say and write the English
+alphabet when they had got me like wax in their hands and I had no
+power to fight them. But if I did you a good turn, sir, I’ll forgive
+them.”
+
+“Now we have got the key at last,” says Carysfort. “We need not trouble
+any more about it.”
+
+The next morning Cleito, the commandant of the palace guard, entered
+their parlour and said to them: “Four days from now, strangers from
+Karamandra, and you will stand before the Royal House in the Hall of
+Audience and of Perfect Justice, and you will reply to the questions
+put to you by the king and by the princesses his daughters, and as your
+answers shall be good or evil in their sight, so shall your destiny be.”
+
+“It has come at last,” said Radcliffe.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XIII
+
+ THE FIRST ORDEAL
+
+
+Four days later, at nine o’clock by their earthly time, the men from
+Karamandra were bidden to follow their escort of guards. Their hands
+were fastened by a light chain which afforded some facilities for
+movement, and they were led in single file between a double row of
+armed men to the terrace upon which they had so rashly alighted. At
+the south end stood a splendid building approached by a noble portico.
+Into this they entered, and passing along a magnificent vestibule, the
+door of a pillared hall was thrown open and they found themselves led
+up the centre of a vast dome-shaped building with tiers of seats on
+either side, one rising above the other, and filled to overflowing with
+a countless sea of human faces, the expressions of most being set and
+stern in their hostility. On the central dais were two semicircular
+rows of elegant and carved seats evidently for the highest in rank,
+while in front were three thrones with gorgeous canopies, the central
+occupied by a most majestic-looking old man and those on either side by
+his daughters Melanitis and Mexitli.
+
+They were both extremely beautiful with the pale tint that so
+characterised the daughters of Atalanta, but there was a difference
+between them, especially in manner and bearing. The elder, the Queen
+designate, was much more humble than her sister--we might almost say
+timid and ill at ease. The younger was haughty, overbearing, and
+dominating, and yet with a sullen expression as though she had not the
+power to do all she wished. She fixed a supercilious glance at the
+terrestrial party, looking from one to the other, but taking not the
+least notice of one more than the other.
+
+But Melanitis had no sooner looked on the faces of Abercromby and
+Radcliffe, who stood the nearest to her, than she uttered a faint cry
+as though stricken, her features became rigid, and she clutched at the
+arms of her throne for support.
+
+The King turned to her and said, “Child of my heart, what aileth thee?”
+
+“Only a solar faintness, my lord,” she replied. The King ordered one of
+the fan-bearers to minister to her.
+
+The incident passed with little notice. Radcliffe did not see it,
+for his eyes were fixed upon the King, who was a grand specimen of
+dignified old age. Abercromby saw it, and a puzzled grin (not very wise
+under the circumstances) overspread his countenance.
+
+“King of Atalanta, pride and ornament of thine ancient house,” said
+the deep voice of a white-robed official of the palace, “and you,
+princesses, pillars of the kingdom, fairest jewels set in the midst of
+the motherland, you see these strangers who have, by an unparalleled
+daring, crossed the myriad depths of space and thrust themselves in
+the midst of us. Their machine is controlled by a power we do not
+possess and whose secrets they alone know. But they themselves are
+weak and helpless as others, and it is for you to declare whether it
+best accords with the well-being of Atalanta that they live or die.
+Let justice and mercy each have their rightful place, yet by all means
+remember that this is an event that may leave lasting traces upon us,
+and as we act now so may we be compelled to act hereafter. For the
+first time since He came who passed from us on His way to Karamandra,
+no being, whether mortal or immortal, has ever visited us who did not
+previously belong to us. We have lived under the silence of the stars,
+and as each generation has gone to the Mansions of the Blest or to the
+Realm of the Endless Shadow they have walked in the wisdom of their
+fathers. But now it may be that some fuller opportunity may be granted
+to us, if we act wisely and well.”
+
+The King leaned forward, and addressing Carmichael said, “Are you from
+Karamandra and also your companions?”
+
+“We are,” said the Professor.
+
+“Did the king of your world send you on a mission to us?”
+
+“There is no king of Karamandra; our world is peopled on both sides
+of its surface with nations, races, and tribes in varying degrees of
+culture and resources, but independent, though some are linked together
+by bonds and alliances.”
+
+“How many people live in your world?”
+
+“About twelve hundred millions.”
+
+An exclamation of horror echoed round the hall.
+
+“How long have they dwelt upon its surface?”
+
+“We have different theories on the subject,” said Carmichael, with a
+sly look at Radcliffe.
+
+“If your world has many kings, which of them sent you?”
+
+“None; we came of our own selves.”
+
+There was a murmur of amazement.
+
+“Who, then, discovered the secret of how to journey from one world to
+another?”
+
+“I did, and also my companion here,” pointing to Carysfort.
+
+“When did you discover it?”
+
+“Many months ago.”
+
+“Will you tell it to us?”
+
+“That depends upon how you treat us.”
+
+Mexitli started to her feet. “Let the insolent barbarian say no more,
+for the land cannot endure his words. His own Sovereign would cast
+him out; much more shall not the sacred Majesty of Atalanta?” Then,
+pointing at Radcliffe, she said, “If my father wills I will question
+_him_, for he it is who saved the life of my cousin Mayana from the
+murderous intent of these men.”
+
+The King nodded acquiescence. The woman’s questions were less academic.
+
+“Why did you come here?”
+
+“My companions had no other object than to benefit their fellows by
+increasing their own knowledge. They made choice of this planet
+because less was known about it than of those worlds that lie in an
+orbit exterior to our own. Being of the same size with our own world,
+my leader naturally hoped to find those upon its surface with whom he
+could hold intelligent converse, and both receive and impart useful
+knowledge.”
+
+“We require no teaching from outer space,” answered Mexitli, “though
+there are some in this hall disloyal enough to think so.”
+
+“The God of Heaven does not give even to every Atalantan equal gifts
+with every other, and yet there may be little things in which the
+highest may receive a helping hand from the lowest. I know the misery
+and unrest of my own world, and yet the God of Heaven has cared for it.
+Most gladly will I explain these things in public or in private if I
+may be suffered to do so.”
+
+“You would be better advised first to look out for your own personal
+safety, that is the present consideration. You and yours do not seem to
+understand that you have committed more than one atrocious crime since
+you invaded our borders. Then, too, the demeanour of your companions
+has been most insolent, as though they expected to be welcomed with
+honours in a land which neither knew of them nor desired them. As for
+you individually, I might perhaps advise the King my father to show you
+a measure of favour, but the time has not come yet. You have leave to
+satisfy my curiosity on one point. How did the God of Heaven show His
+care for Karamandra?”
+
+“By sending His only Son, the Prince of Heaven, to save them by turning
+their hearts back again to Himself.”
+
+A violent movement of surprise pervaded the hall; strange to say,
+Melanitis did not show the agitation displayed by the rest, but
+remained outwardly calm.
+
+“I thought so,” answered the King. “Our best traditions led us to think
+it would be as you say.”
+
+“Good gracious! we are going to have a battle-royal about religion,”
+muttered Carysfort to the Professor.
+
+“And how did your world act towards Him when He came to them?” asked
+Mexitli.
+
+Radcliffe stood speechless for a moment, his voice choked; a tear
+trickled down his face.
+
+“I should not wonder if they killed Him,” interposed Melanitis.
+
+Exclamations of horror and astonishment broke from all sides.
+
+Mexitli shrugged her shoulders with a look of disgust. She signed to
+Radcliffe to proceed and said imperiously, “Speak the truth--is this
+horrible thing true?”
+
+“It is true,” answered Radcliffe in a whisper that sent a thrill
+through every heart in the hall. “I would have died in His stead had I
+been there, and yet I do not know: one who professed to love Him said
+as much and then basely deserted Him; so might I.”
+
+“How is it that your world exists after doing this?”
+
+“God is Love,” replied Radcliffe.
+
+There was a moment’s tense silence, then the princess said, “Did
+_anything_ happen?”
+
+“Yes; the offer of pardon was sent all over the world, for God forgave
+the world, for the death of the Prince made full amends for all the
+wrong that men had done. The divine justice was satisfied. He who had
+been slain came into that world for the very purpose that He might lay
+down His life for it. He came as man in lowly guise, enduring all the
+sorrows of our life, and those who slew Him did not know what they were
+doing. That is why forgiveness was possible for them. _Now_ the Prince
+has re-entered upon His heavenly and immortal life, but He will come
+again and take possession of His rightful inheritance, our own world.”
+
+“How long ago did these things happen?” asked the King.
+
+“Nearly twenty centuries by our reckoning.”
+
+“And have your people, the human race, returned to the divine
+allegiance?”
+
+“Many have done so out of each generation, but many have not.”
+
+“_You_ have done so, I suppose? Your speech, methinks, implies it.”
+
+“I have,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“I am too shocked and horrified to pursue this talk much further,”
+interrupted Mexitli. “It is evident that _our_ world is guiltless,
+while as for yours,”--and she finished the sentence with a
+gesture--“such people can be only plague-spots amongst us. Still, you
+have told me the truth. Is it to be conceived after this, that even
+_you_ came here to teach us?”
+
+“God made use of the very men who had helped to slay His Son to go out
+and in many cases successfully to carry the story of peace all over the
+world. It may be that He will give even to me a work to do here.”
+
+“Your life has first to be decided upon, and next your liberty,” was
+the cold reply. “We shall have to deliberate over these amazing things.
+You can now sit upon yonder seat. Of course you have been severely
+tried. I would confer with the man who stood next to you. Come forward,
+fellow, and answer my questions. What brought _you_ here--science or
+religion?” The words were pronounced with a fine contempt.
+
+“Neither,” said Abercromby; “something as good as either, possibly
+better--to help my brother who has just spoken to bear his life sorrow.”
+
+“The sins of his people, I suppose.”
+
+“That, doubtless, but also another. He loved a woman on his own world,
+and made her his wife. They were estranged, and before the quarrel
+could be made up she was killed by an accident in a river; he was not
+with her at the time. _I_ persuaded him into coming with us, as the
+best chance of saving his reason.”
+
+“Did he love her so much?”
+
+“I know not how love prevails in _this_ planet, but if all there exists
+of it were put together it would about equal the love he had to her.”
+
+“You are not required to pry into such matters. Are you his relation?”
+
+“No, I am his friend. That is a stronger bond in most cases.”
+
+Mexitli bit her lip in evident vexation. The King betrayed a faint
+smile.
+
+Melanitis sat perfectly rigid, her face deadly white, her hands tightly
+clasped, her eyes fixed upon Radcliffe, who kept his face bent upon the
+ground. Mexitli darted a swift glance at her sister, her expression as
+she did so was inscrutable. At last she said to Abercromby, “Let us
+leave this matter. Do the people in your own world know of the secret
+by which you have come to ours?”
+
+“I decline to answer your question,” answered Abercromby.
+
+“This is absolute defiance, and will only bring you all into worse
+trouble. You _must_ have intelligence to comprehend how greatly this
+matter will concern us.”
+
+“When you tell us what you are proposing to do to us, we may perhaps
+give you the information; till then I am silent until my leader bids me
+to speak.”
+
+“I will make you speak,” said Mexitli.
+
+“Who are barbarians _now_?” retorted Abercromby.
+
+“Let me entreat you to use moderation and courtesy, Frank,” said
+Radcliffe, putting a warning hand upon his arm. “Lady of Atalanta, I
+ask and beg of you this grace, that you will give us time to consider
+what the answer shall be.”
+
+“No one knows of our secret,” interposed Carmichael. “We are wholly at
+your mercy.”
+
+“Is this true?” asked the princess of Radcliffe.
+
+“Yes,” replied Radcliffe.
+
+“Then it shall be considered in your favour, only I shall remember
+that one of you at least spoke insolently to my face, in the central
+seat of authority in our motherland.”
+
+“My decided vote is given for their lives,” said Melanitis.
+
+“If you wanted to spare them you could have scarcely spoken a more
+ill-advised thing,” her sister answered. “By this act of public
+utterance you force me to speak myself, and I decide for the death of
+all of them and the immediate destruction of their machine, with this
+one exception, that, according to the clemency of our laws, I would
+allow Radcliffe a year’s respite under certain proper restrictions.
+But as our voices are thus divided, it is for the King, my father, to
+speak.”
+
+“People of Atalanta,” said Malchon, “we have heard to-day such things
+as would tax the wisdom of the wisest amongst us to decide, whether
+those who have stood on trial before us ought or ought not to die. Only
+on one point is the way made plain. The man called Radcliffe can be
+respited for a year, that we may confer with him about many things and
+test and prove him. As to the rest, I dislike the thought of putting
+them to death, if it can be avoided with safety. I propose that they
+be kept in durance for a short number of days, and be fully told the
+charges of ill-doing which have been brought against them. They can
+carefully ponder their reply to these charges, and make it publicly
+in our presence. Also they must give us a brief account of all their
+movements since they reached our world. I bid them good speed till
+the day of final examination comes, and if they behave in a suitable
+manner, I hold out a reasonable prospect for their safety.”
+
+With these words the assembly rose up, and the men from earth were led
+back to their courtyard prison.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XIV
+
+ THE SECOND ORDEAL
+
+
+“We shall have a few things to talk over,” was Abercromby’s first
+ejaculation when they found themselves alone. “I hope to goodness,
+Professor, you will give us A1 marks for our respective contributions
+to the drama.”
+
+“I think you all did admirably, both those who spoke and those who held
+their tongues,” answered the Professor.
+
+“They were a queer trio,” observed the engineer, with a chuckle. “I
+don’t suppose old King Malchon is allowed by his two daughters very
+much more power than the House of Commons allows to the kings of
+England--he reigns but he does not govern.”
+
+“I was once told of a parish up in the north, sir,” put in Tom, “where
+the parson, his wife, and his daughters were in charge, and the folks
+said as how they were under the thumb of the Rector, the Director, and
+the Misdirector!”
+
+“Not bad that, Tom,” said Carysfort; “but, seriously, I _can’t_ make
+out the elder princess. The younger is quite understandable though not
+agreeable. She would cut our heads off, if she could, though I have a
+notion she would like to cut off her sister’s also. Take my word for
+it, this country is run in for civil war when poor old Malchon dies.
+Two queens at a time means business in this case.”
+
+“Aye! I believe it,” said the Professor; “but there is something else I
+should much like to fathom. Why did Melanitis seem struck in a heap, as
+they say, directly she caught sight of us?”
+
+“Easy of explanation, my dear Professor: she fell in love either with
+me or with Clarence at first sight. At first I thought I was in it, but
+I incline to think it was Clarence.”
+
+Radcliffe had gone to his room and was fast asleep, so the others could
+talk apart from him.
+
+“I wish he could get a wife, sir,” said Tom; “_that_ would make him
+happy again better than anything.”
+
+“I’ll see what I can do,” replied Abercromby hopefully.
+
+“A word before you begin,” dryly remarked the Professor. “We must be
+extremely careful what we are about. I do not want to be pessimistic,
+but I foresee nothing but trouble ahead. That the elder princess is in
+love with one of us, presumably Radcliffe, I do not deny: it is the
+only explanation of her conduct. But to us it spells disaster either
+way. He must obviously do one of two things--accept or reject. If he
+responds to her advances, the whole of Atalanta will be up in arms,
+saying that we outer barbarians have dared to aspire to the King’s
+daughter.”
+
+“We need hardly consider that,” observed the engineer. “Radcliffe will
+remain true to the memories of the past.”
+
+“Well, then, if he does, he will repel her, and this, I myself think,
+to be the more probable. Then he will make Melanitis his implacable
+enemy.”
+
+“But he must do one or the other,” said Abercromby. “For his own sake I
+hope he will open his campaign quickly.”
+
+“We shall all lose our heads if he does, and the expedition will be
+wrecked,” answered Carmichael somewhat angrily. “I do beseech you,
+Abercromby, use your best influence with him for his own sake and
+ours. We are in a desperate position as it is; do not make it worse by
+importing women into it.”
+
+“It is not even as though we had Melanitis only,” protested the
+engineer, “we have her implacable sister also to deal with. Just
+imagine what a rage she will be in if she should once suspect.
+Radcliffe might, with equal safety, make love to _her_. Every hatred
+and prejudice that can riot in a human heart would be set on fire.”
+
+“I have a pet theory that she would rather like it--I mean if Radcliffe
+made love to Melanitis. Suppose his doing so led to her being set
+aside, then Mexitli would be queen herself.”
+
+“Very ingenious, my dear fellow, but the ladies do not usually walk
+along the lines we intellectually trace out for them. You may be right,
+but it is far too desperate a game to play. Remember we have death
+still in front of us, and that even if we are spared, it may be only
+conditionally.”
+
+The conversation then dropped, Abercromby having promised that he
+would not endanger them by any imprudence.
+
+The next day they were furnished with a list of the charges made
+against them. The chief of these were that they had come to Venus at
+all, on a private enterprise not authorised by their own people, which
+left them free to do any damage or injury to the realm. Another was
+that they had drawn their weapons upon Mayana and her husband, when she
+had given proof that she did not mean to kill them, by only destroying
+a tree. Another, that they had dared to alight upon the terrace of the
+royal palace, and a last charge was a general accusation of insolence
+and defiance to the Royal House and its representatives.
+
+Radcliffe was told he need not reply to the charge of drawing weapons,
+nor to that of disrespectful speech, as on those charges he was
+acquitted.
+
+Naturally the prisoners talked the whole matter carefully over and
+arranged their several lines of defence. Carysfort, who could speak the
+language better than Carmichael, would be the spokesman, and, though
+he was a plain, blunt man, his good sense and shrewdness would be
+likely to be of service to them. Abercromby was implored not to speak,
+and, after some trouble, he consented. Tom could not say a word in
+Atalantan, but he promised to speak in English if a sentence was passed.
+
+Radcliffe kept his thoughts to himself, and would not tell the others
+what he meant to do.
+
+They were not called upon to undergo any period of prolonged suspense,
+for the summons came on the fourth morning after their return to
+prison, to stand once again in the Hall of Perfect Justice. Every
+available inch of standing-ground was occupied, and it took a
+considerable time before the accused could be led to their places
+immediately in front of the triple throne. So far as appearance went,
+the assembly was somewhat less hostile in demeanour than on the first
+occasion when they had confronted it. The preliminaries took up but
+little time.
+
+Another official of the palace read the several terms of the
+indictment, and then Malchon the King rose from his seat and said, “Men
+of Karamandra, ye have heard the charges brought against you, all of
+which are more or less serious and deadly. But we hope that time and
+reflection have enabled you to frame such answers as shall satisfy us
+that we do no wrong to our people and our authority if we permit you to
+live.”
+
+Carysfort then stood up. He gave a plain and straightforward account
+of how the discovery had been made, and also the principles upon which
+it was based. He told them that they had come as private individuals;
+first, because the people of his own world were utterly sceptical of
+the possibility of such an attempt, and, had they disclosed it before
+starting, they would have either been ridiculed or else prevented, for
+one nation was jealous of any advantage gained over another; next,
+it was for the good of Atalanta that the people of his world should
+not make it the object of their ambition and rapacity. After briefly
+recapitulating their researches in the northern parts of Venus, he then
+went on to explain that they had drawn their weapons in a moment of
+overwhelming panic, just as the Atalantans would have done had they
+been in like circumstances. As to alighting on the palace terrace, they
+had followed the course taken by the two Atalantans who had visited
+them in the airship; that these had even pointed in the direction of
+the city as though inviting them; and they had chosen the terrace
+because it was the highest spot, the most accessible for their machine,
+and they had supposed that it would be the more easy and convenient to
+address a special deputation of persons, and to appeal to them by signs
+and even to invite them to enter and inspect their machine. As to their
+conduct, they must be allowed to plead total ignorance of the modes of
+thought of the Atalantan people; they felt it neither compatible with
+their honour nor even their safety to assume an abject and crestfallen
+attitude; they were brave men, as was proved by the myriad dangers they
+had so boldly endured in crossing twenty-four million miles of space;
+they asked only that they might meet brothers at the end of their long
+journey, and not judges and executioners.
+
+Malchon showed evident pleasure at this reply of the engineer, and was
+about to speak when Radcliffe stood up and made earnest request to say
+a few words. Leave being granted, he said, “I wish in the name of truth
+and justice to take upon myself the full load of responsibility for
+what seems to have been a serious act of wrong on our part. It was _I_
+who gave counsel to my friends to steer direct for the city and for
+the palace, due, as I now perceive, to an erroneous interpretation
+of the signs which the two notables of Atalanta made to us. They were
+referring, of course, to their own movements, and not to ours. Forgive
+me if you will, but, if not, on my head let the penalty rest.”
+
+Melanitis looked up quickly and met the glance of Radcliffe with an
+expression of such yearning intensity that he turned away almost with
+a shudder. Then she said to the King, “Spare them, my lord; no one in
+their world knows their secret, no one can therefore come hither to
+injure us.”
+
+“I will never consent to spare them altogether,” said Mexitli, “unless
+they are willing to teach their secret to us, and even then they must
+lie under the sentence of death for at least a year, so that if they
+commit offences against our laws it may be at once carried out. As to
+Radcliffe, I pardon him. This is the utmost limit of concession to
+which I will go.”
+
+“So shall it be,” replied Malchon. “Your lives are justly forfeited
+to our laws, and we therefore pass conditional sentence upon you,
+with the exception of him to whom my daughter, at her cousin’s most
+earnest entreaty, has given the full grace of clemency. But this may
+be earned by the rest, if at the end of a year they show themselves
+worthy. They need not be kept in prison beyond a day or two, provided
+they are willing to promise in writing an assent to certain rules and
+restrictions which shall be appointed. Radcliffe may go where he likes,
+but he will not probably wish to be separated from his companions. As
+to their machine, it will be kept by us as the property of our Royal
+House. It shall not be injured nor destroyed. The goods and instruments
+which it contains shall be returned to its late owner. Whether the
+machine be again entrusted to them will depend upon their own conduct
+or upon circumstances. I may send them back again to their own world
+under penalty of death to them or to any other persons who shall follow
+in their enterprise, or I may require them to spend their lives here. I
+shall adopt the course which seems most desirable as time and their own
+behaviour may dictate.”
+
+Just as the King was about to dismiss the audience Frank said to the
+engineer--
+
+“I wish old King Cole had been a little more definite.”
+
+Melanitis gave him a warning glance, but unluckily he went on--
+
+“The Johnnie talks like a diplomatist who has left his mind behind him
+in the cloak-room.”
+
+“Be quiet, can’t you!” grumbled Carysfort. “You will give the whole
+show away in a minute.”
+
+These idioms were unknown to Mexitli, but the sound of Frank’s voice
+was enough of itself.
+
+“_You_ will remain in a prison _alone_ for two months,” she said. “This
+will give you time to repent of the insult you offered to me four days
+ago.”
+
+Radcliffe made a movement to throw himself at the princess’s feet, but
+Melanitis, not quite guessing his intent, grasped him by the arm and
+drew him back.
+
+“I was but about to sue for the pardon of my friend,” he said. Mexitli
+turned quickly round and said with a smile--
+
+“You had better not, it may only make matters worse. I might call _you_
+to account for seeking to alter a royal decision, but I give you grace
+this once for your ignorance of our customs. You had best rejoin your
+people; they are being led from the hall.”
+
+There was nothing further to be done, and he obeyed.
+
+Poor Abercromby had to bid his comrades farewell at the palace
+entrance. He looked very downcast and dispirited, for his sentence had
+come upon him as a bolt from the blue. They were equally vexed and
+distressed on his account. Tom asked his master if he might not use
+his fists this once just to keep his hand in, but Carmichael happily
+succeeded in pacifying him.
+
+“The best part of the news is that we have now a sporting chance of
+getting out of this hole,” remarked Carysfort when they had bidden poor
+Frank good-bye.
+
+“You mean ultimate permission to return to the earth?” asked the
+Professor.
+
+“I shall not return,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“Beware of Melanitis,” remarked Carmichael dryly.
+
+“I do not fear her just because I have no love to give her, my love
+is dead and buried; if it is anywhere it is in the little country
+churchyard near Chipping Norton, where my honoured father-in-law lies
+buried by the side of his only child who was my wife.”
+
+“We are in Venus,” remarked the Professor. “Don’t think me unfeeling,
+but it is a far cry to Chipping Norton.”
+
+“Yes, it is a far cry to Chipping Norton,” murmured Radcliffe. “I
+sometimes feel I could get hold of any Atalantan woman and ask her if
+she understood. I could even tell Mexitli all about it.”
+
+“Better tell Melanitis and cut a rather intricate knot,” answered
+Carmichael in a dry tone.
+
+“I think I shall. It will end a ghastly farce, and if she sends me to
+the stake itself, well, so much the better.”
+
+The next day the ordinances, with which they were to be bound, were
+served to them. They were few in number and simple enough, as far as
+words could go, but it had yet to be seen how their practical working
+would tend to render life pleasant or hard. No difference was made
+between them, except that Abercromby had to await his release from
+prison. They were to remain in the city under the eyes of the court,
+to live in the house which would be provided for them, to wear their
+own terrestrial dress, so as to be distinguished from the people, not
+to go away from the city further than a prescribed distance, except by
+permission, to place themselves at the royal service to render any help
+that might be required, and, except Radcliffe, to come up for final
+sentence at the expiry of a year.
+
+These terms were of course very vague and indefinite. They naturally
+presented an earnest petition, that, in consideration of all that
+they had risked and suffered, they might be allowed to travel to the
+southern pole of the planet, and this they were at once informed would
+be readily granted after a few weeks’ interval, when the season of
+heavy rains was past. They were further told that they might freely
+move in and out among the people, and both give and receive information
+to and from all classes.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XV
+
+ A TALE AT A SUPPER PARTY
+
+
+Two days after they had given their assent to the terms laid upon them
+they were removed from the place of durance and conducted by Cleito and
+Arniphon, the two officers of the King’s guard, to a house in the lower
+part of the city standing in a shaded plantation of trees a few hundred
+yards off the Avenue of Ascent, as it was called, which led from the
+lake shore to the palace. The house was of simple construction, with
+a verandah and balconies adorned with climbing plants to screen from
+the heat of the sun; it was two-storied, as were most of the houses in
+Atalanta, the guest-rooms below, the sleeping-rooms above. They had,
+of course, Tom to wait upon them, but as he knew no more of Atalantan
+ways of life than they did themselves, his services were not of much
+use. Every one in the land--every man at least--had to provide for
+himself and make his house self-supporting, unless he belonged to
+the aristocracy, among whom the relation of master and servant still
+survived in a modified sort of way. Consequently the Professor, though
+a temporary and unwilling citizen of a great city, could not get a
+single person to help him, unless it were some one who had fallen into
+disgrace.
+
+The Atalantans, it is true, helped one another in all cases of illness
+or difficulty or as an expression of private friendship; but the
+terrestrials, though objects of unbounded curiosity, were treated as
+quite beyond the pale, especially by the women, who would no more have
+thought of coming to their house than to a cave of wild beasts.
+
+Consequently, they were for a time almost in danger of being starved.
+They were allowed, it is true, to have their earthly supplies from
+the machine, but this could only be temporary at best, and they were
+far from wishful to strip the Asteroid bare, for they did not know
+what future use they might have for them. The King now and again
+sent them gifts from the palace, but these were not so often edible
+as their needs required. Tom once tried to sell some of the King’s
+gifts for food, but fortunately for his life he could not make himself
+understood, the Atalantan to whom he offered them declining with
+profuse politeness.
+
+“I pointed to my mouth half a dozen times,” protested Tom. “Even a
+bloomin’ Frenchman, if I had been in Paris, would have known I wanted a
+mutton chop, but that donkey only made me a bow.”
+
+“We shall have to eat grass yet, old fellow,” said Carysfort, “as
+though we were donkeys ourselves.”
+
+It may well be imagined that the position of their comrade Abercromby
+gave them the most acute uneasiness. Twice a day they were permitted
+to hear from him, and he used to write a sentence in English. As he
+was not allowed to make any allusion to his own position, he tried to
+keep up his spirits and theirs by sending them burlesque mottoes and
+maxims, which at least proved that he was very much alive. They were
+such as these:--
+
+“Henry the Eighth and King Malchon should have changed planets for the
+good of their wives.”
+
+“Is an eclipse of the sun ever produced in these skies by an airship
+with a happy man sitting alone in the middle of it?”
+
+“Gladstone would have altered the Home Rule Bill had he been here,”
+etc. etc.
+
+Radcliffe, however, felt certain that poor Abercromby was far less
+jocose than he represented himself. He would have been very much more
+alarmed if he had known that every word he had written was sent in copy
+to the palace, even the English writing being imitated. Cleito gave him
+a warning intimation coupled with the strange remark that the Princess
+Melanitis nearly shook with laughing when she saw the paper. Naturally
+puzzled, he told Carmichael about it.
+
+“I should think,” said the Professor, who had very obvious reasons for
+what he said, “that this is only another proof that she is quite as
+unfeeling as her sister. Perhaps she guesses the import of his remarks,
+and chuckles over his useless complaints and sarcasms. You remember
+that she did not give you the least help when you made your brave but
+vain appeal.”
+
+“I suppose it is so,” replied he in a wearied tone. “I shall not
+trouble to find out why she laughed.”
+
+A day or two after this it chanced that Radcliffe was walking by
+himself along the promenade by the lake, which reminded him strangely
+of some of his holiday haunts in old England. Groups of people were
+seated under the trees talking in languid tones, or else listening to
+some female singers, who, with quaint-looking instruments and rich,
+mellow voices, were singing the praises of the motherland. This was a
+very trite subject and pretty well worn, but the people seemed always
+to awake to interest at it. As he drew near he heard--
+
+ “Sing me the praise of the Land of Light,
+ Where the Lord of the sky looks down
+ On the hill and the meadow resplendently bright
+ Reflecting his glory and crown.
+ Creation holds not a world so fair
+ With its sky-piercing hills and its far-spreading air.
+
+ “Its people are happy, their faces serene,
+ Untroubled their lives pass along.
+ The work of their hands gives them all things I ween,
+ The fruit of their toil is a song.
+ Yet fain would we know, when its beauties we miss,
+ Shall the spirit-clear eyes look on fairer than this?
+
+ “Enough, for such questions unanswered must be,
+ Let not each generation complain;
+ If life must end in uncertainty,
+ Let us sing in the absence of pain.
+ Since the half of our world is so wondrously fair
+ Why should we grieve if the other be drear?”
+
+Radcliffe felt strongly impelled to stand up and address them, but his
+courage failed him just at the critical moment. There was something in
+those faces so absolutely self-satisfied, so serenely proud, that it
+seemed harder to appeal to them than to the fiercest and most hostile
+mob.
+
+“I see you are much interested, stranger, in one of our popular
+melodies,” said an Atalantan, who had been watching him closely.
+
+“I wish I could be one of you, even the lowliest, that I might fully
+know your ways of thought. How can I possibly be of any use to you
+until I do?”
+
+The stranger smiled. “Well, as a means to that end, instead of
+listening to poetry that I at least have heard many hundreds of times,
+you shall come home to our mansion, which is close by, and sup with us.
+We may be able to regale you with better music and song, and you may
+tell us something of your own planet. My wife is Mayana, the cousin of
+the princesses, and we owe you no small debt of gratitude.”
+
+In a half-dazed condition Radcliffe went in through the noble portico
+and into the mansion; there he was led up to Mayana and her younger
+sister Minya, who unbent themselves, and gave him a warm greeting.
+Supper of fruits and iced drinks was laid upon a side table, and the
+Atalantan gentleman served it to the others, not permitting Radcliffe
+to serve, as he was a guest.
+
+Conversation flowed freely.
+
+He told them of the journey across space and of their feelings when
+they drew near to the city. Again he was profusely thanked for having
+averted death and misery, but his efforts to exculpate the others were
+not as successful as he had hoped.
+
+The conversation turned upon the court, and Radcliffe sang the praises
+of the King in no sparing terms. Cleophon, Mayana’s husband, smiled and
+asked why he did not say a word in honour of the two princesses.
+
+“Because I am afraid,” he answered. He thought they would laugh at him,
+but they did not.
+
+“There is no serious reason for feeling this,” said Mayana; “you are
+high in favour, and may rise higher yet. But naturally we Atalantans
+prefer to be ruled by one of our own sex, though we all love and
+sympathise with the poor dear old King.”
+
+“Why does he look somewhat sad?” Radcliffe ventured to ask.
+
+“Cleophon, tell the story; our attendants have been requisitioned at
+the palace, so we are quite by ourselves,” said Mayana.
+
+“It is a strange tale,” he began. “Years ago the Princess Melanitis
+was the joy and brightness of her father’s heart; she was very
+high-spirited, an Atalantan of the Atalantans, and looked upon as the
+most able ruler who would ever sit upon our throne. She was stricken
+down by solar fever, and reduced to the very point of death. The King,
+distracted with grief, went to the Temple of the Sun on the lake-island
+yonder; he prayed all night to the God of Heaven, and, in his despair,
+he used words quite contrary to all justice and moderation. ‘Let her
+recover,’ he said, ‘though she be a shame to me and to my house; let
+her recover, though she live to break my heart and the hearts of all my
+people.’ The high priest told him that his prayer would be answered,
+but he would live to rue the day that it was. When he returned to the
+palace the princess _had_ recovered. She awoke from the very stupor
+of death. She stretched out her arms to him, but when she saw him she
+uttered a cry of horror that will not be forgotten by those that heard
+it. Her senses returned, and yet they did not return. She could not
+speak her own tongue; she did not know the meaning of anything that she
+saw; she did not know her way about the city or even the palace. She
+was infinitely more helpless than you were when you were made prisoner
+by the crowd.”
+
+“How dreadful!” said Radcliffe.
+
+“Malchon recognised his rashness and bowed bravely to it. He summoned
+the wisest men of the land, for wisdom seems one of the few things that
+we men can claim as our own.”
+
+“_Some_ wisdom,” corrected Mayana.
+
+“Well, I have a king’s word for it. But this is no jesting matter. She
+had to be taught everything from the very beginning. Gradually her mind
+came back, but her memory of the past never came back; she knew nothing
+of her former life except as she was told. But there is a stranger
+thing still. When she was again made fit to assume the duties of her
+princely station, she seemed to have lost all interest in them; she was
+just as clever as before, but her cleverness seemed so very different.
+She took up with science, especially astronomy. She was always paying
+visits to Aptaura, and would spend hours in the study of the heavens,
+of your planet, and of the outer planets. Even her opinions on religion
+were different; nothing would induce her to pay her devotions in the
+Temple of the Sun. She took a great interest in the old bygone faith
+of Atalanta, when men prayed to the God of Heaven directly, and she
+gathered all the knowledge attainable as to the visit of the mysterious
+Divine Prince who, as you had the courage to tell us, was cruelly put
+to death by the inhuman savages in your own world, when He had come to
+die for them. Never within living memory was any audience so stirred
+as when you gave your straight answer to those awful questions put to
+you by her sister. My advice to you is to cultivate the friendship of
+Melanitis, and to answer all her enquiries about Karamandra and its
+people. You might even do something to chase the clouds from her brow.”
+
+“There have been cases in my own world of people who have been
+sun-stricken turning totally different afterwards,” said Radcliffe, who
+sat wrapped in thought; “an honest man has been known to steal and to
+commit the worst of crimes.”
+
+“I do not wonder,” put in Minya, “that she never worships in the
+Temple; her father has never once entered it again.”
+
+“What are her relations with her sister? I would not ask so grave
+a question, but for fear lest I may do the princess an injury by
+increasing her interest in things foreign to this planet.”
+
+“Pray have no fear on that ground,” replied Mayana. “So utterly has
+Melanitis ceased even to care to rule that Mexitli has it all her own
+way. Nothing but the will of the King induces Melanitis to be even
+considered Queen-Elect, and I have a secret opinion, based on some
+words Mexitli dropped to me, that, directly the King dies, there will
+be no conflict between them, for Melanitis will resign her claims. They
+were bitter enemies once, but they are friendly enough now, though only
+those are aware of it who are behind the scenes. But in my inmost heart
+I a little despise my elder cousin.”
+
+“A former King of Atalanta gave up the crown,” murmured Cleophon.
+
+“Yes, but he was a _man_,” said Mayana; “you will not find a _queen_
+doing so.”
+
+“I take my corrections as I take my exercise--philosophically,”
+answered Cleophon.
+
+“You are the best of your sex,” replied Mayana; “I have no fault to
+find with you.”
+
+Radcliffe rose, and bidding his host and hostess farewell, took his
+departure after Minya had sung in her beautiful voice two or three
+patriotic songs, “How Keraunion died for his friend,” “Make the best of
+half a world,” “One only nation.”
+
+“The Prince died in Karamandra for His enemies,” remarked Mayana
+thoughtfully; “I suppose that was better. But we never treated Him like
+that.”
+
+“Lady,” said Radcliffe, “are there not slights that are injuries more
+painful than death?”
+
+“Perhaps there are. You doubtless accuse us in the days of old for
+letting Him depart without a welcome, because our pride could not
+understand His humility. Well, if we were wrong, we have been punished,
+for we have had no one to teach us ever since.”
+
+“I labour under the triple disadvantage of being a Karamandran, a man,
+and, at every step I take, under the shadow of death, but I will tell
+you all I know, and all He taught in my own world.”
+
+Mayana coloured slightly, but the intense earnestness of the speaker
+disarmed her. “You can if you like,” she said; “I will see you again
+and you shall talk to us. But Melanitis is the one most certain to take
+up with these new ideas.”
+
+“You must be very careful what you do,” observed Cleophon. “You will
+have bitter prejudices to overcome. We are not a teachable people, we
+think we know all things, and where we admit our ignorance, we withhold
+our interest.”
+
+“At least this is a house full of friends and you are welcome,” said
+Mayana, and with these words in his ears Clarence Radcliffe turned
+away to enter the palace avenue, and then to the little dwelling in
+the light blue plantation which was supposed to be their home. For a
+moment his sense of utter loneliness was almost overwhelming. He wished
+himself anywhere, even facing again the perils of space.
+
+Home! Where was it? All places and even all planets seemed alike. The
+shadow of an airship passed overhead and uttered its peculiar wailing
+cry. This gave him the explanation of their startling surprise, and
+also something to think about.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XVI
+
+ MALCHON’S GOSPEL
+
+
+The Professor and the engineer had not had a very pleasant time. With
+their companion in prison and no longer able to enliven them with his
+rattling talk, with all their future hopes clouded, separated from
+their machine, and compelled to work at the most common details of
+existence, it was no wonder that they grew somewhat disheartened and
+sad. When they went out they found themselves shunned if not actively
+disliked, and though they went in fear of no _bodily_ peril, it really
+seemed as if the whole population had decided to let them severely
+alone and to do nothing to help them.
+
+Tom was always in a condition of latent hostility, and it was well
+that he could not speak the native language, considering the number of
+times he swore in Anglo-Saxon. The very boys and girls in the streets
+and promenades would sometimes hurl opprobrious epithets at each member
+of the party; once a child struck Radcliffe as he was passing by; but
+this was going too far, and the offending youngster would have been
+severely punished if Radcliffe had not gone to the palace himself and
+interceded. This act was much talked about in the city, but it did not
+have the effect that might have been hoped, although he ended the
+hostility of one family.
+
+One day, being seriously uneasy at this state of things, he went to
+crave an audience of the Princess Mexitli herself. She received him
+urbanely enough, but his pleading for the others was the reverse of
+successful.
+
+“You all had no right to come here,” she said, “and you must put
+up with what you receive. All I can promise is that when the man
+Abercromby is set free, which I will not allow till his time of
+punishment has expired, then you shall all travel in your airship to
+see the wonders of the southern pole. We shall probably go with you; it
+will suit the time when we make our annual progress thither. This will
+be a pleasure to you all, and to that you may look forward. And now I
+have a command to lay upon you. Will you take us over and explain to us
+the different parts of the Asteroid?”
+
+“Whenever your Highness shall direct.”
+
+“Then come with me now. This is the hour when we usually take our
+interval of sleep. But it will be all the better, as fewer eyes will be
+upon us.”
+
+In a little time the two princesses, each accompanied by an attendant,
+repaired to that part of the terrace-square on which the Asteroid was
+fixed. Radcliffe conducted them all over it, explaining the meaning of
+the different objects, and gave a full account of the mechanism and of
+the newly discovered force by which it had been propelled in space.
+He had never felt more free since he had alighted upon the planet; he
+could forget now that those whom he was addressing could send him by a
+word to a doom of terror, he felt rather like a lecturer demonstrating
+to a small class of pupils.
+
+The princesses seemed highly delighted with what they had seen, and
+declared that they would certainly travel in it. Among the last objects
+which they noticed was a book lying open upon one of the cabin tables.
+It was a New Testament. Melanitis took it up, turned over a few
+pages, and said to Radcliffe, “Why should you not turn this book into
+Atalantan? We have no print like this, but we have means of reproducing
+copies of our exquisite public handwriting. I could furnish you with
+helpers.”
+
+Radcliffe started violently. “Do you know what that book is?” he said.
+
+“How should we, when we speak only our own language?” said Mexitli,
+with some tartness. “But let me tell you, I will allow no book from
+another planet to be circulated among the people, unless it be, in my
+opinion, useful, and not unsettling to their minds.”
+
+“It is the life and teaching of the Saviour Prince, and an account
+of how those who were faithful to Him carried on His work after His
+ascension,” replied Radcliffe.
+
+“Indeed!” said the princess, much astonished. “Well, you may translate
+it for us if you like. My father the King takes a great interest in all
+such deep subjects. But only a small part can be suitable for _our_
+world, I should say.”
+
+“Leave it to me, I will arrange everything for you,” said Melanitis
+quickly.
+
+“I insist upon having my voice in the matter,” Mexitli struck in.
+“This is too serious for even my sister to take wholly upon herself.
+However, religion is about the only thing I should be at all willing to
+accept from outside, because we have practically none of it ourselves.
+Sun-worship is ridiculous, but it is perhaps good enough for uncultured
+minds.”
+
+“Do the people treat the sun as a divinity, or as only the noblest
+representation of God in the visible creation?”
+
+“You must ask the philosophers about that. It is no duty of us
+princesses to go about and discover how much or how little the people
+believe. But come, the heat is too great here for such serious talk;
+we will return. Set about your book, and work at it till the rain-mist
+season is over, and then bring it to us.”
+
+The very next day two of the King’s scribes came to their house, much
+to the astonishment of both Carmichael and Carysfort. When Tom was
+informed, he said he could not see why they should pull the old Book
+about; what was good enough for Moses was good enough for him. The
+Professor had to break it to him that Moses had not been connected with
+either the English or Atalantan versions.
+
+Radcliffe worked hour after hour dictating and receiving hints in
+return, until the Gospel of St. Luke and the Acts of the Apostles had
+been rendered into very decent Atalantan speech, though, of course,
+there was a great lack of elegance and finish.
+
+While thus engaged the rain-mist season came on in its full intensity.
+The land was deluged with dew and moisture, fog and rime. The weather
+was distinctly chilly. Many of the people took occasion to pass the
+time in rest and sleep, and there was a succession of something like
+terrestrial mornings and evenings, according as the mist increased or
+diminished.
+
+Towards the end of the period the King sent for Radcliffe and had a
+long conversation with him. He praised his diligence, and said that he
+would do all in his power to further his wishes. But he advised him
+as a friend not to be too hasty in setting himself up as a teacher
+of the people. It would be better to induce the Atalantans to teach
+themselves. “You desire to incline my people to become disciples of
+Jesus Christ, as you terrestrials appear to call Him. Of course, this
+is but natural, for every disciple, worthy of the name, seeks to enlist
+other disciples for the teacher whom he admires. My poor Melanitis
+seems much disposed to enter into your plans, and you cannot do better
+than work through her. My other daughter will have probably greater
+influence than she, when I am gone to the Mansions of the Blest, and
+you have done well to conciliate her in every way that your conscience
+allows. I have not much direct power; it may be that Mexitli is
+impatient for my too prolonged life to end. I blame her not; but I
+would give much to be sure that my darling Melanitis loves me as she
+did in the olden days. But a truce to this, though sometimes I feel I
+can talk more freely to you than to my own people. We are swathed in
+forms and ceremonies, in pride and social prejudice, and I long to be
+able to converse freely, even with a stranger.”
+
+“Would your Majesty tell me the story I have desired so much to know:
+how, and under what circumstances, He, who is the Master whom I serve,
+came to Atalanta?”
+
+The King paused a moment. Then, inviting Radcliffe to be seated,
+he said, “This is the pith of a sad and shameful story, the most
+disgraceful in the whole history of my race. My people lived in much
+the same place as now, though on the northern shores of the lake of
+Meloria. Atalanta was not built as a city. We were but few in number
+then, about twenty thousand maybe. A stranger of noble and gracious
+aspect came over the Keraunian Hills. We had suffered much from
+sickness and calamity, flood and fire. He came and nursed our sick back
+to life; He taught us many useful things; He benefited us in every
+possible way; He did menial services for us; but He told us that He
+was the Son of the Mighty God, and that, if we put our trust in Him,
+He would make us noble and happy and wise while we lived, and then
+take us to His own Home beyond the stars where we should be His angels
+and serve Him for ever. But the people of Atalanta would not accept
+Him; they believed that He came from some other planet, but not that
+He was the Prince of Heaven. He gave them many proofs of His divine
+greatness, but very few accepted Him or became His disciples. This went
+on for some time, and at last the men of Atalanta got exasperated; they
+accused Him of saying that they were sinners against God, whereas
+they committed no crimes but were just and upright. At last they
+arrested Him, and the Council of Elders, for we had no kings and queens
+then, sentenced Him to work for Atalanta by building a road over the
+Keraunian Hills. He toiled at this work for a whole year, some of those
+who loved Him working with Him.
+
+“At last this cursed road was built, and when it was finished they
+said, ‘We will not hurt You nor ill-treat You; we bid You depart and
+leave us in peace.’ Then He said, ‘I am going to Karamandra to suffer
+there for the sins of its people and to proclaim to them the true
+way of salvation. But as for you, ye shall increase and wax mighty,
+and have great riches and prosperity, and dwell for many centuries
+unmolested and unvisited. Ye shall mourn during those days that ye have
+no sure knowledge of eternal things, but no knowledge shall be given
+you till the hour comes that, as a people, ye shall humble yourselves.
+And in the end of the ages I will come again, first to the guiltier
+world and then to this which is less guilty, and from both take to
+Myself an elect assembly of those who are My true disciples. Meantime
+love and serve one another, as I have served you, and the work which I
+go to do upon Karamandra shall avail for this world also. Believe in Me
+and My words, and wait, be the time never so long, for the Return of
+the Light which you now despise.’
+
+“Then He went away, and was seen no more. This is the sum of what I
+have to tell you, my friend; seek to make the best use of it that you
+can, and go forward wisely and prudently.”
+
+Radcliffe encountered Melanitis as he left the King’s private cabinet.
+She smiled upon him, but her eyes showed that she had been weeping
+intensely. He more than suspected that she must have known of what had
+passed, but he did not question her.
+
+That same evening Radcliffe was wending his way to the house as well
+as he could; the mist had lifted somewhat, but showed evident signs of
+swooping down again. He had just turned into the Grand Avenue when a
+voice was heard from behind a tree, “Will you oblige, sir, by telling
+me the way to Professor Carmichael’s house?”
+
+Radcliffe stopped aghast! Here was some one in Venus accosting him in
+English! For a moment he stood petrified, then a hand was laid on his
+shoulder. It was Frank Abercromby!
+
+The latest joke had pretty well used him up. He was more like a
+scarecrow than a man.
+
+“What have they been doing to you?” said Radcliffe, his growing
+admiration of things Atalantan sinking down to zero.
+
+“Teaching me to love princesses. But come, old man, will there be a
+good meat tea ready for us when we get back?”
+
+“The Professor and the engineer and Tom scarcely know how to live. We
+have had to grow our own vegetables and fruits, and Tom, the other day,
+found he had planted some the wrong end uppermost.”
+
+“Everything seems upside down in this beastly planet. Whatever did we
+come here for? Why didn’t we pull up half-way and start back? How are
+the boss and the engineer going to manage?”
+
+“We shall be allowed to travel in the Asteroid to the southern pole
+when the weather changes.”
+
+“That’s something. I shall vote for going further.”
+
+“But we shall not be allowed to go alone.”
+
+“Not _alone_!” shrieked Frank.
+
+“No; the princesses are going with us.”
+
+“The deuce they are! And did you invite them?”
+
+“Certainly not: they invited themselves.”
+
+Abercromby swore steadily. “Well, we can drop one at either pole and
+then make off for earth. I am sick of the whole business. So are the
+others too, I fancy.”
+
+They walked on silent. Then Abercromby said, “How are you getting on
+about Melanitis?”
+
+“I love her as a sister.”
+
+“Does she love you as a brother?”
+
+“Look here, Frank, all frivolity must end. I am going to give the New
+Testament to Atalanta; the Royal House have practically settled it.”
+
+“Take care they don’t practically settle you.”
+
+“I believe this whole nation is on the eve of a change.”
+
+“Great Scott!” was all that Abercromby could say.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XVII
+
+ THE PERILS OF CROSS CURRENTS
+
+
+Fortunately for himself, Abercromby had a very cheerful temperament,
+and the presence and society of his friends soon dissipated his gloom.
+He was reticent as to his experiences in the prison, but it did not
+seem that he had been treated with any positive cruelty, but rather
+with neglect.
+
+The warders seldom showed themselves, and he was left to his own
+melancholy reflections, his chief suffering consisting in the
+scantiness of the food given to him.
+
+The party sat down to their rather sorry meal and then retired to rest,
+which he especially needed.
+
+The next day, as it seemed to offer a prospect of fine weather,
+Radcliffe went with Abercromby for a long walk. They penetrated to
+the west end of the city, ascending a hill, from whence they enjoyed
+a fine view over the Lake and its island, with the dome-shaped Temple
+glittering in the sun. Then they plunged into a forest glade, where
+they met but very few people, most of whom saluted them with at least
+a semblance of courtesy; and then they rested in a kind of secluded
+dell, where they found themselves altogether alone. They had not,
+however, been there many minutes before they noticed an ominous
+fading of the light, and soon the rain mist was upon them. Fortunately
+a few hundreds of yards away stood a low-roofed house in a clearing
+surrounded by a garden in no very good state of order. They took
+refuge in an out-building, but they had to retreat into the innermost
+recess before they could find a rain-proof spot. The wall formed
+only a thin partition, and they could hear the noise of a rather
+animated conversation going on within. Not wishing to be surprised as
+eavesdroppers, they knocked loudly at the wall, and the next moment
+there was a sudden hush, a sound of footsteps, a door suddenly opened,
+and two men appeared.
+
+The taller of the two uttered a sharp cry, but instantly held out his
+heavy hand to welcome them. “Come in, my lords,” he said; “you are just
+as welcome as if you belonged to this down-trodden world of ours, and
+may help to lift us up if you are willing.”
+
+He led them into a sort of back kitchen where some food was being
+prepared, though its perfume was scarcely inviting. There were half a
+dozen to a dozen persons present, all men, for a wonder.
+
+“Brother Parmenton,” said the tall man, “these new-comers need no
+introduction. They are two of the terrestrials. Praise the Sun God
+for hiding his august face awhile, or else they had not come here for
+shelter.”
+
+“Are the men in your planet masters or slaves?” asked the worthy who
+was addressed as Parmenton.
+
+“Both,” said Abercromby.
+
+“Do they rule their women folk or do their women folk rule them?”
+
+“That depends upon circumstances,” said Abercromby. “I fancy our world
+is getting rather like yours.”
+
+“Will you help us to make our world what you imply yours was in days
+past?”
+
+“What mean you by that?”
+
+“Help us--the people--to be men and not slaves.”
+
+“And what are we to do, and are you going to do for the other people?”
+
+“Fencing with words is not good when men are determined.”
+
+“And still less when the ladies are.”
+
+“True; therefore we intend to practise deeds and not words.”
+
+“We have waited centuries before doing so,” cried Mauro Katakalon, a
+rough-looking Atalantan who at least enjoyed the luxury of two names.
+
+“Look here, Clarence,” said Abercromby; “what the dickens does all this
+mean? Are we going to run our necks into a social revolution? If so, I
+beg leave to back out.”
+
+“My masters,” said Radcliffe earnestly, “the beasts of the field will
+ride over you until you become true disciples of the God of Heaven. He
+alone can make any one free.”
+
+A shout of derisive laughter greeted his words. “That is the man who
+has come here to preach a new religion,” said Medon, a third member of
+the party. “No use in him, he is one of the palace slaves; talk to the
+other. The tyrant put him in prison for two months. He will listen to
+reason.”
+
+“We have, as strangers, nothing to do with your politics, whether
+social or domestic,” said Abercromby hotly, “and having barely saved
+our lives we do not mean to place them in peril again. If there is to
+be a war of sexes, or any other war, on this amiable planet, you must
+fight your own game. _We_ are not going to be mixed up in it.”
+
+“You do not hesitate to turn our religion upside down,” said Parmenton
+angrily, “and Mexitli is quite content you should, in order to crush
+by your help the one venerated leader we have left. When she has done
+that, _your_ turn will come next.”
+
+“I shall obey my conscience and do my duty,” answered Radcliffe firmly.
+“My Master Christ shall be the true King of Atalanta.”
+
+“Say that again,” shouted Medon, “and you shall pay dearly for it. Go
+and preach your wretched religion in Atalanta city, and see how you
+fare at the hands of every honest citizen.”
+
+“Take my advice,” said Mauro Katakalon, “listen to Melanitis; _she_
+sympathises with our wrongs and would redress them if she could. She
+is nearly as much a woman of your world as if she had come from there.
+She is dead opposed to our whole social system, and would make every
+Atalantan equal.”
+
+“She is a Christian,” said Parmenton vehemently, “and equally opposed
+to us in faith. But I would forgive her even that, for she would let
+us have a taste of freedom. As for you,” he continued, pointing to
+Abercromby, “you have been covered with indelible disgrace through
+having been in prison, and you can only escape it by joining us in
+founding a new social order. In a very short time Atalanta will be
+free, and Mexitli hung on a gibbet in front of the Temple at whose
+worship she has mocked.”
+
+“This talk has lasted long enough,” said Radcliffe sternly. “We are
+no better than other men; we have not, I think, been accorded the
+hospitality that was due to us; but, for all that, we take Atalanta as
+we find it, and utterly renounce all unholy and sanguinary deeds. Allow
+us to pass, if you please; if not, we shall resort to force. Wherever
+we go we are watched, and if we were detained, _you_ would answer for
+it.”
+
+“Let them go,” grumbled Medon, “we are better without them. We shall
+have a nobler leader than they, and a trained force to support him.”
+
+When they found themselves in the open air Abercromby gave himself a
+shake, like a dog coming out of the water. Radcliffe remarked: “They
+all seem to harp upon the change which has come over Melanitis, though
+I suspect it has been greatly exaggerated by credulous report.”
+
+“Possibly,” said Abercromby. “How long is it since her illness and her
+extraordinary recovery, the unlucky result of Malchon’s rash prayer?”
+
+“Seven years,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“The years of Venus, I suppose. Just oblige a duffer by telling him how
+long it takes Venus to rotate round the sun?”
+
+“Two hundred and twenty-four days, I believe.”
+
+Abercromby turned his head very sharply; they had just come in view of
+the Lake and the Temple. Radcliffe did not notice that his companion
+had gone white to the lips.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+When they reached home they found the Professor and the others in
+rather a flutter of excitement. “We have had a visitor,” said Carysfort.
+
+“Male or female?” asked Abercromby.
+
+“Male, of course; no other would come unless to shoot us.”
+
+“Who was it?” enquired Radcliffe.
+
+“Lydon.”
+
+“And who the dickens is Lydon?” said Abercromby. “Don’t dole us out our
+information by instalments.”
+
+“The high priest of the Sun,” answered the Professor. “He came with
+two attendant priests, clad in gorgeous robes and with full ceremony
+and state. He remained about an hour, talking over all matters of
+interesting information.”
+
+“Yes, and more than that,” observed Carysfort. “He told us that there
+would be a great festival of the Sun on the first regular day of the
+sunny season, and he hoped we would honour it by our presence. He
+also told us that the archives of the Temple contained documents of
+priceless importance, written by those who lived near to the time of
+the event in which Radcliffe is specially interested. He will show them
+to Radcliffe if he will pay a visit to the island.”
+
+Radcliffe and Abercromby exchanged significant glances.
+
+“Did he express his views as to any social or domestic matters
+connected with the well-being of the commonwealth?” enquired
+Abercromby, who seldom used elegant phraseology except when he was
+joking.
+
+“I do not think he is at all friendly to much that now goes on,”
+observed the Professor.
+
+“Then may I suggest that we do not accept his hospitality till after
+the festival is over?” said Abercromby.
+
+“I would not make a foe of him,” observed the engineer.
+
+Radcliffe went out by himself and took his way to Mayana’s house. He
+failed to see her, but Minya granted him an interview, and before he
+was aware of it she had put to him a string of questions the full drift
+of which he did not quite clearly understand. But he answered her as
+explicitly as he could, and she then said that he ought on no account
+to visit the Temple, it would be as much as his life was worth to do
+so; he must not ask any reasons but be led entirely by her advice,
+which was given in all good faith.
+
+When he got home he found that Abercromby had been doing his best to
+persuade the others that Lydon was not to be trusted, despite all
+the treasures which he might have at disposal to show them. Tom was
+not altogether of his way of thinking; he was apparently anxious to
+see the old conjurer’s bag of tricks, as he elegantly expressed it.
+The Professor and the engineer were not moved so much by literary
+instincts or general curiosity as by a desire not to provoke any more
+hostilities.
+
+Abercromby said: “You are all of you as credulous as the Cambridge
+freshman who was disinclined to subscribe to his college boat, but as
+he took in whatever we told him, we said one day, ‘Tearle, you ought
+to be ashamed. The Vice-Chancellor was running along the tow-path in
+flannels this afternoon, bawling out, “Well rowed, Trinity!”’ that
+fetched him quite, and he gave us a guinea on the strength of it.”
+
+Radcliffe had come in, and his appearance suggested to Tom a new
+argument. “Don’t you think that as Mr. Radcliffe wants to be a
+missionary to these ’ere savages the priests had better take him in
+hand in their college so as to give him points?”
+
+“My dear Tom,” said Abercromby, when he had finished laughing, “Mr.
+Radcliffe hardly wants to be coached in paganism.”
+
+“Bless you all!” said Tom, “I’m a fool. I thought they were Christians,
+just for a minute.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XVIII
+
+ THE FESTIVAL OF PANACLA
+
+
+The first day of the month Panacla, meaning “the forth-shining,” had
+now commenced, when the rain mist was supposed to have finished its
+mission in Southern Atalanta.
+
+The Vale of Meloria was bathed in the most exquisite light, mellowed
+and tempered by the snow-white clouds that trailed along the sky at an
+immeasurable altitude.
+
+A large crowd of people had gathered by the Lake shore watching the
+island that lay nearly in front of the great city. At the foot of the
+Grand Avenue a line of palace guards was posted, the meaning of whose
+presence was not at first quite clear to the terrestrial party. Cleito
+smiled significantly when the Professor enquired if the procession
+would approach the palace. “Wait and see,” was all he said.
+
+At last a flash of light leaped from one of the pinnacles of the
+island Temple. Some of the people kneeled down as though to pay their
+devotions. Others did not, but stood scornfully erect.
+
+Soon a cry arose and hands were pointed towards the Lake. A barge
+gaily painted, propelled by a number of oarsmen, was gliding rapidly
+towards a landing-stage, a quarter of a mile to the east. Two other
+barges followed, one having a superb gilded canopy. The occupants of
+these landed and were received with adoration by a kneeling crowd.
+Then a procession was formed. The vanguard consisted of a troop of
+young children in pure white with coral-coloured fillets in their hair,
+holding in their hands white wands of sharp-pointed metal. These formed
+a semicircle, grouping themselves into a guard of honour; then came
+a band of players beating some oval-shaped instruments and raising a
+weird intonation. Following them was a woman robed as a priestess. She
+sang with rich, penetrating voice--
+
+ “O Lord of Light! O Lord of Light!
+ Filling the land with glory bright,
+ Thine enemy retires[1]
+ Into the darkness whence he came,
+ Awed by thy majesty and fame,
+ Cowed by thy burning fires.
+
+ “While Atalanta shall endure
+ Thy worship shall stand fast and sure,
+ All its proud foes defy;
+ Though thou mayest veil thy glorious head,
+ Thou comest forth to smite with dread
+ Each impious enemy.
+ Hail, Asti! Potentate and King,
+ Receive the worship that we bring.”
+
+[1] The rain mist.
+
+As she passed by she was followed by the priests of the Temple, each
+carrying golden spears. Then came a canopy under which an altar was
+borne, with a solar disk at each corner and a larger one in the centre.
+Behind came a litter borne upon the shoulders of four tall and powerful
+men, and reclining upon it was the high priest Lydon. The procession
+halted. The litter-bearers laid their burden down. Lydon stepped forth.
+He placed the altar in position; he kindled the central disk, which
+revolved with a fiery radiation. Then he turned to the crowd, most of
+whose members had now kneeled down. His eyes fell upon the Professor
+and his party, who stood somewhat uncomfortably prominent. He shot
+them a keen glance. Then he said: “Men of Karamandra, there are those
+who brand you as barbarians; the priesthood knows no such distinction.
+Come ye, offer incense to the Sun God, the first of all invited to
+draw nigh.” So saying he placed the vessel of incense in the hands of
+Carmichael.
+
+“I must go through this farce, I suppose,” said Carmichael, “though
+I should be ashamed for my Cambridge friends to see me. It is only a
+form.”
+
+“Yes, of course,” assented Carysfort.
+
+“You shall _not_!” exclaimed Clarence Radcliffe, and he struck the
+vessel out of the Professor’s hand. For an instant there was an awful
+silence. Every one stood in paralysed astonishment.
+
+“This may be my last moment,” exclaimed Radcliffe. “You may tear me in
+pieces, but I will offer no incense, except the incense of my heart, to
+Him who is not the material sun, but the Sun of Righteousness.”
+
+“Silence, blasphemer!” shouted Lydon, hoarse with rage. “What ho!
+guards and champions of our ancestral faith, take this son of
+Karamandra, who has insulted us and our god, and remove him to the
+sacred island. There he shall be taught how to frame his words and acts
+with discretion.”
+
+Before they could seize Radcliffe, Abercromby and Jackson had felled
+the two nearest to the ground, and grasping their companion they
+endeavoured to pull him away. The crowd was in the wildest commotion,
+some cursing him for his sacrilege, others applauding the act. Some
+urged on the priests to secure the prisoner, others cried, “Long live
+the palace and the throne. Down with the traitors!”
+
+In the midst of the turmoil Radcliffe had mounted on a seat, and
+addressing his voice to those nearest, he said, “People of Atalanta!
+How long will you worship that which is only a furnace of molten fire,
+fit emblem of punishment and of woe? What would the sun do for you if
+the God who placed it there were to cause its light to fail? Would
+not this side of the world be even as the other? I set before you Him
+who is greater than all things which He hath made--eternal, immortal,
+invisible. He can guide you to the Mansions of the Blest, into which
+all who love Him are safely gathered,”--here Radcliffe’s voice broke a
+little. “Atalantans! worship God. He has given you all things, even the
+very powers with which you neglect Him.”
+
+At this moment Mayana herself, heading a detachment of the palace
+attendants and wearing the red coronet as a symbol of authority, thrust
+herself forward, followed by Cleophon and Minya. “Begone, Lydon!” she
+said. “Go back to your island and deem yourself fortunate that you are
+allowed to dwell there. All your plots are known. This is the last
+time that you shall ever issue forth with your rebellious rabble to
+delude and incite the people.”
+
+“I will go,” said Lydon in a voice inarticulate for rage, “but the cup
+of your iniquities and that of Mexitli is running over. I--or rather
+the Sun God--shall be avenged.”
+
+“Behold the powerlessness of your god, for his face is about to be
+hidden!” shouted Radcliffe. And as he spoke the rain mist gathered and
+veiled the fair landscape. Shrieks of terror and despair, intermingled
+with laughter and mockery, came from different parts of the crowd.
+Radcliffe suddenly heard a cry from Abercromby. He started to ascertain
+the cause. As he did so he felt a violent shock, and all consciousness
+left him.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+“Where am I?” said Radcliffe when he had somewhat regained his senses.
+He was in a luxuriously furnished room. Melanitis was bending over him,
+supporting his head upon her arm. “I have been dreaming that I was
+in Wales, going up the Portmadoc Road to Pont Aberglaslyn Pass with
+Lilian. But what nonsense am I talking, and in English too!” he added,
+correcting himself. “Lady, I did not know you were there. Has my speech
+been wandering? I could have declared I heard some one singing to me an
+old English song, which we--my wife and I--used to sing together.”
+
+“You will be always true to her, will you not?” said the princess.
+
+“Unto death and beyond it,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“Did you ever stay with her and her father the year before you were
+married at a town called Tenby?” asked Melanitis.
+
+Radcliffe started up on the coach, his face rigid with amazement.
+“Yes, the happiest time in all my life, except one,” he added. “But
+how--_how_ did you know it?”
+
+Melanitis smiled. “I know a good many things,” she said.
+
+“Is second-sight understood in this planet?”
+
+“No; and if it were I should not practise any such arts.”
+
+“Have you ever visited my world in your dreams?”
+
+“Dreams are of little account, except day dreams. But a truce to this.
+I want you to realise two things. One is that I perfectly sympathise
+with you in your life sorrow. Another is, that God may provide you a
+way out of it sooner perhaps than you think.”
+
+Radcliffe was about to answer when the door opened and King Malchon
+entered. The old man, who looked worn and haggard, took the seat which
+Melanitis had vacated, and said, “I rejoice that you are recovering, my
+son. My daughter here has given you all the resources of her medical
+skill, and has gradually nursed you back to life. A great debt is it
+that you owe to her. But we all owe a debt to you hardly less great.
+Your conduct three days ago helped us to frustrate for the present the
+designs of our enemy.”
+
+“God be thanked for that. But what happened to me?”
+
+“You were struck upon the head by a club hurled by one of the traitors
+in order to silence you,” said the King. “He would have repeated the
+blow had not the fire-tube which Mayana held in her hand smitten him.
+There was a conflict between the loyalists among the people and the
+rebels, and several lives were lost. No such thing has happened among
+us for generations. The rebels were compelled to retreat to their
+island and its temple fortress. Mexitli and Melanitis both urged me to
+carry it by assault and to put its colony to death, but I shrink from
+such bloodshed as would result. I have forbidden, however, any similar
+festival being held again.”
+
+“Has the lady Mayana or any member of her house been injured?”
+
+“None; for the good Cleito arrived with the guards just in time.”
+
+“Where are my companions?”
+
+“Lodged within the palace. I shall not allow them to be outcasts any
+more.”
+
+The rest of the day was spent by Radcliffe in the society, now of the
+King, now of Abercromby, now of Melanitis. They all helped to make the
+hours pass pleasantly. Only when he was alone did he ponder in his mind
+the extraordinary knowledge which Melanitis so evidently possessed. And
+when the Professor came in to see him he told him about it and he asked
+his opinion: “The simplest imaginable, my dear fellow. You have been
+delirious, and she has overheard you talk.”
+
+“But why is she so solicitous that I shall always be true to the memory
+of my lost love?”
+
+“I do not pretend to fathom women, but perhaps she has heard rumours
+that affected herself, and she naturally wishes by your help to give
+the lie direct to them.”
+
+“But she says that God will, sooner than I think, make a way for me to
+end my sorrow.”
+
+“I see more than one explanation of her pious desire, my dear
+Radcliffe, but I won’t pursue the subject.”
+
+“Where is Mexitli?”
+
+“Absent on state business.”
+
+“Is she resentful for what I did?”
+
+“Not in the least. She is hugely delighted. The danger does not lie
+with her. Be very careful of the other one.”
+
+“Abercromby says the opposite.”
+
+“Then chum with the King. _He_ is safe enough.”
+
+Before they retired to rest, Mayana entered, asking to know how the
+sick patient was. She offered to sing him one of the sweetest songs of
+Atalanta. It was entitled “Little Queen of the Night.” She took up a
+harp-shaped instrument, and seating herself by the side of Melanitis,
+sang--
+
+ “When the birds shall homeward fly
+ And the sunlight shall descend
+ Where Aptaura rears on high
+ His steep rampart to defend.
+ Is there any light beyond
+ As I face the frost-bound field,
+ Do the stars with eyes so fond
+ Their sweet magic influence wield?
+
+ “Aye! the brightest and the best
+ Of the starry host above,
+ From the east unto the west,
+ Looketh down with glance of love.
+ ’Tis the little Queen of Night,
+ That surveys the cold drear waste,
+ Yet her self-forgetful light
+ Whispers: ‘Hasten, traveller, haste.
+
+ “‘O be not further led
+ By fond foolish thoughts of me,
+ For I shine upon the dead
+ In my helpless sympathy.
+ Turn your face towards a light
+ That is nobler far than mine,
+ And the little Queen of Night
+ Will not grieve nor yet repine.’”
+
+“Beautiful, beautiful!” said Radcliffe. “And that little Queen of Night
+is my world that only shines on the cold dead hemisphere of Venus.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XIX
+
+ AN AERIAL VOYAGE WITH DIVERS EXPERIENCES
+
+
+A week later they made their start for the southern pole. Mexitli was
+to lead the expedition as far as the island of Melandria; her return
+would depend upon news from the city.
+
+“The first thing we shall have to consider,” said Abercromby, “is to
+find room in our blessed machine for the whole multitude of maidens who
+are keen upon coming with us. _We_ shall have to tidy up, of course.”
+
+“Don’t trouble yourself, my dear man,” said Carmichael. “The engineer
+consents to stay at home, and Jackson will stay with him. We three will
+go and sleep in the store-room, while the cabins and the dining-room
+can be allotted to the people for whose coming you are so naturally
+zealous.”
+
+In fact, the machine was at the travellers’ disposal now, and they
+spent several days in upholstering it according to Atalantan taste. It
+was about a week before all was ready for the start, and by then the
+weather had finally cleared and the heat was rather severe.
+
+Radcliffe had been indeed nursed back to life and health by Melanitis.
+Abercromby’s attitude to her was rather curious. He was always most
+courteous and deferential, save in one point, that he constantly
+talked in English to Radcliffe when she was present, and often
+contrived, even in the midst of a conversation that seemed to be
+jocose, to make allusions to the past life-sorrow of his friend.
+He would endeavour to throw them together as much as possible, and
+keep himself in the background. All this was not only puzzling but
+irritating to the Professor, who seldom spoke to Melanitis except when
+courtesy required, for he not only disliked her but feared exceedingly
+as to what was going to happen. One day, when they were on the eve
+of departure, he remarked to Abercromby: “The thing that beats me
+is to understand how a woman of Mexitli’s character can be blind to
+what is so patent--that her sister, and one whom she must regard as a
+barbarian, are very much in love. At first it was all on the woman’s
+part, but now I am convinced that Radcliffe is himself yielding, at
+least so far as this, that he gives to Melanitis the second place in
+his heart. The princess hopes, no doubt, in time to win the first,
+though she is too wise to hurry matters. But all this must be clear to
+Mexitli, and why does she not show her hand?”
+
+“You told me yourself that there is no accounting for the ways of women
+or their inward logic,” said Abercromby, “but I am going to ask _you_
+a question. Is Melanitis in the least degree afraid of what her sister
+might do to her?”
+
+“Not in the least, so far as I can see, and this is the queerest part
+of it all. But do _you_ yourself, Abercromby, trust Melanitis?”
+
+“Perfectly.”
+
+“Do you, not as a rival of course, but in the way of brotherly
+affection, love her?”
+
+“I love Radcliffe more.”
+
+“Because you have known him longer?”
+
+“For that and other reasons.”
+
+“I believe you know more than you choose to say.”
+
+“I want you not to think me a lunatic before it is necessary.”
+
+Mayana, Minya, and Cleophon remained behind in the palace to assist the
+King in the event of dangers or difficulties.
+
+The two princesses were to accompany the expedition, and were (it was
+distinctly declared) to lead it in every sense of the word. Several
+aerial vessels were to follow in their wake. Malchon, however, was
+haunted by an uneasy thought, and one day he said to Radcliffe in
+Mexitli’s presence: “You leave behind two of your number as hostages
+for your return and our own airships will follow you. I trust you
+fully, my son, and I am beginning to trust your friend Abercromby, but
+your leader is a man of science and thinks naturally more of his people
+than of me and mine. I know the capabilities of your machine and that
+it could, in a few minutes, leave us for ever. Will you promise me, in
+the name of Jesus Christ, that you will not do this but be faithful to
+the trust I repose in you and bring the princesses safe back to the
+palace?”
+
+“I will do this and also more. We shall not take our terrestrial
+weapons but leave them behind in your safe custody. Let the princesses
+take their own weapons, and it is we who shall be at their mercy, not
+they at ours.”
+
+Mexitli took both the hands of Radcliffe in hers and pressed them.
+
+Carmichael was not altogether pleased with this arrangement. He
+indignantly denied that he had ever contemplated “doing a bolt,” as
+Abercromby phrased it, but he was rather perplexed to know what might
+happen to them if by chance they put their guests in a bad temper.
+
+On the first day of the new month--Antarana, meaning “the greater
+heat”--the party took possession of the Asteroid; the King, accompanied
+by his guards, councillors, and attendants, amongst whom Carysfort and
+Jackson were present, came to bid them farewell. Jackson, forgetting it
+was Venus, took off his hat by way of respect, but the sun soon caused
+him to discover his mistake. Mayana and her sister were affectionately
+embraced by Mexitli, who whispered in their ears some warning words
+that evidently had Lydon for their chief object, as his name was heard.
+
+The dining-room window was thrown open, and the balcony fixed in its
+place, so that the fresh air might penetrate to every part of the
+machine. The Professor went to the conning-tower and set the engines
+in motion. He was rather vexed that Minola, Mexitli’s maid of honour,
+stood by his side, silent, but noting everything that was done. The
+others gathered on the balcony watching the landscape beneath them.
+They were all in the gayest mood, more like frolicsome children than
+people who, even then, held, or were held by, the powers of death.
+Mexitli quite threw off her haughtiness and seemed thoroughly to
+enjoy herself, and to want all the rest to do the same. To Abercromby
+alone she was still a trifle distant, but the latter was so perfectly
+respectful that it soon disarmed her.
+
+“I say, old man,” began Abercromby to Radcliffe, “I wonder what the
+Proctor would say to me now. I once ran him half round Cambridge, but I
+should have drawn the line at an airship. Have you heard at Oxford the
+song of the Proctor? It is deeply pathetic, but not quite applicable to
+this side of Venus.
+
+ “Every proctor has his bull-dog,
+ Man of doughty might,
+ When he sallies forth in full tog
+ ’Mid the shades of night.”
+
+“Is that poetry you are reciting?” said Mexitli.
+
+“Yes, a song of Cambridge, the town where I passed my examinations--no,
+no, where I pursued my studies.”
+
+“Please sing it to me in Atalantan.”
+
+“How the deuce am I to do it?” said Abercromby. “Do give me a tip.”
+
+Radcliffe promptly said--
+
+ “When the bold-faced idler flies
+ From the work he ought to do,
+ Man and beast, with vengeful cries,
+ Through the streets the knave pursue.”
+
+“How interesting!” said Mexitli. “I _should_ like to see it.”
+
+All this time Melanitis had been in a condition of explosive laughter.
+
+Meanwhile the Asteroid had been passing above the south side of the
+great city and then away over the gap between the two hills. The
+country seemed to grow every mile more beautiful--forest and meadow,
+waterfall and bubbling stream, with houses of quaint architecture,
+both small and great, perched on eminences, surrounded by groves and
+gardens, while a level causeway led from the south of the capital
+through the environs, stretching far away into the distance, curving in
+a south-westerly direction. Every now and again an airship passed them
+on its way to the city.
+
+Abercromby narrated with much animation the story of the aerial monster
+whose cry of wailing had so suddenly disturbed their encampment.
+
+The face of Melanitis grew grave. “It was the ship of death,” she said;
+“a prisoner condemned by us was taken to the dark hemisphere to die.”
+
+“How was he killed?” asked Radcliffe.
+
+“He perished in the cold night,” said Mexitli in a rather hard tone.
+“He was a spy of the priests, who sought to stir up disaffection. When
+the ship of death sighted the polar terrors, it was lowered to the
+frozen ice-field; the man was turned adrift with the customary words,
+‘Unworthy of the glories of the day, worthy of the terrors of the
+night.’ The task accomplished, the ship returns and awaits its next
+hapless passenger.”
+
+“Would that have been _our_ doom, princess?”
+
+“It might have been; it very nearly was. By the by, you seriously
+transgressed our laws in haranguing the people in a place of public
+resort, as you did on the occasion of that absurd festival. But, of
+course, you were on our side, so you won’t hear any more about it.”
+
+“Are open-air addresses contrary to the laws of Atalanta?” asked
+Radcliffe in a rather pained tone.
+
+“I can alter the laws if needs be,” said Mexitli; “but you must seek
+my permission before you adopt any such method again. I will give you
+plenty of other means of carrying out your plans. You see, any address
+to the people savours of sedition, as it has been always used for that
+end; but perhaps I shall let you have your wish in due time.”
+
+“Look! The sea! the sea!” cried Abercromby. “I am as excited as old
+Xenophon’s Greeks. An airship would have settled their job much more
+quickly. He would not have had to write so much Greek, and I might not
+have been ‘plucked’ in consequence.”
+
+“Leave these old-world allusions and look at this glorious sight,” said
+Mexitli; “there is the coast-line of our grand continent, and away,
+beyond the horizon, is Melandria.”
+
+“This is much more like a terrestrial view, is it not?” said Abercromby
+to Melanitis.
+
+“Much more like,” she replied.
+
+Radcliffe darted upon her a swift look of uttermost surprise.
+
+“The observatory on Aptaura is a famous place for seeing Karamandra,”
+she said.
+
+“Very excellent indeed,” remarked Abercromby in a somewhat inscrutable
+tone.
+
+Mexitli pointed to a colony of houses overlooking a forest that
+extended nearly down to the shore. “We will picnic there,” she said.
+“Minola, tell the pilot of our good vessel to direct it to the point
+which I indicate.”
+
+Carmichael obeyed with a docility rather novel to him, and they came
+to an anchor on a meadow-green lawn of smooth grass only a few feet
+elevated above the water’s edge. A venerable Atalantan matron, leaning
+upon the arms of her son and nephew, came forward from the terrace
+of the house nearest to the sea and made a profound obeisance to the
+princesses.
+
+“Carmichael,” said Melanitis, “be so good as to guard the Asteroid
+while we picnic here, we shall not be long.”
+
+Abercromby looked rather indignant, but at last broke out into a laugh.
+
+“Come, Professor, don’t elope to China; no, of course, I mean to
+Atalanta. Write your notes and edit your experiences. Be a Cambridge
+don, and dream you are sending me down.”
+
+“Eat some lunch will be more likely,” grumbled the Professor. “I have
+taken the precaution to bring a decent pile of sandwiches with me; I
+only regret they were not made even in Germany.”
+
+The statuesque Minola sat down close to the entrance to the machine;
+she began to read one of the manuscripts which Radcliffe had finished.
+The Professor had his lunch all to himself, watching his silent duenna
+with feelings far from satisfactory, for the maiden had always one of
+the green tubes at hand, and seemed quite ready to use it.
+
+The aged woman’s name was Amarilla; she had lived all her life in
+this lonely corner of the empire, supporting herself by the work of
+her son’s hands and her own. They had made a little paradise of this
+rough shore-line. She was deeply versed in the religious philosophy
+of her country in its ancient form, and had always lived in hope that
+she might, as she phrased it, “hear the silence of the skies broken.”
+During the picnic conversation flowed apace; Amarilla besought the
+strangers to tell her of their own world and of its people, of their
+religion, their laws, their arts, their government.
+
+Radcliffe and Abercromby obeyed; the princesses sat motionless and
+silent, taking in every word.
+
+Their principal topic, however, was the history of the Christian
+religion in Karamandra and the desperate struggle it had waged with its
+pagan foes.
+
+Radcliffe told the story of Polycarp, of Cyprian, and of Perpetua and
+Felicitas, at which his hearers were intensely moved.
+
+“You will never have these obstacles in Atalanta,” said Amarilla, “but
+you will have others, chiefly the invincible unwillingness of the
+people to bestir themselves, to awake from the dreaming of centuries,
+and from the pride which makes them believe that everything in the
+Flowery Land is perfect and can never be altered except for the worse.
+My rulers command me in all things but one: they let me give the
+allegiance of my soul to the King of Heaven and to the exiled Prince.”
+
+“Mother, I allow you to speak quite freely, but tell me in return,
+are you quite sure that the allegiance of which you speak will never
+conflict with the allegiance to the throne?”
+
+“Try it, princess, when you are queen, and you will find that the more
+your people love God the better will they serve you. And as for you,
+strangers, go forth and spread everywhere the things which God has done
+for your world, and pray to Him that He may yet do equal things for
+ours.”
+
+Both the princesses took a fond farewell, and then they returned to the
+Asteroid.
+
+While the Professor resumed his duties as steersman, the party once
+more discussed subjects of literary interest, as the machine pursued
+its short aerial journey to the island.
+
+“One of the prettiest samples of our national poetry,” said Mexitli,
+“is the lyrical invocation to the Sun God. I omit the part which is
+abominably idolatrous, but the prelude, where Asti vaunts his own
+greatness, is at least geographical--
+
+ My power doth fence the realm of polar snows,
+ My rays smite kindling, high Aptaura’s pile,
+ Mine is the light that on Meloria glows,
+ And mine the twilight in Melandria’s isle.”
+
+Abercromby had been making his first attempt at Atalantan poetry by
+trying to turn “All in the hush of twilight” into Atalantan verse. He
+was fairly successful, though Mexitli told him he must study for a year
+before he could do real justice in their own poetry to a lovely lyric
+in another language. All agreed, however, that though not suitable to
+Central Atalanta, where the sun was not on the horizon, it would be
+sure to take the fancy of the Melandrians, for they always had to live
+in a twilight land, and loved it so much, that they would like to be in
+the hush of the twilight from end to end of their planetary year.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XX
+
+ THE ISLAND OF TWILIGHT
+
+
+The spin over the sea about thirty miles in length, through a swift
+current of bracing air, was soon accomplished. The heights of the great
+island quickly towered before them. Melandria had a more terrestrial
+look: there were bays and roadsteads, where many ships might have
+lain at anchor. But of these there were none; all communication with
+the mainland was through the air. A large town lay along the sea
+border, with a long esplanade and something like earthly roads, and
+highways led out from it into the interior. The island was at least one
+hundred miles in circuit; its greatest breadth was about twenty miles,
+narrowing to a long trailing peninsula, not much wooded, but covered
+with open moorlands, while the glowing orb of the sun on the horizon
+lit up the whole landscape with a sunset splendour. In the middle of
+the island was a high-peaked hill, from the summit of which a dazzling
+spot of white snow could be discerned to the south.
+
+“There is Aptaura, the boundary line between two hemispheres, close to
+the southern pole, and twenty miles in height,” said Mexitli.
+
+They anchored on the top of the peak. Near to the top, in a sheltered
+hollow, lay a beautiful country house, the residence of the governor
+of Melandria, whose name was Andron. He only held office during the
+King’s lifetime. He was a very learned man, and he rejoiced at the
+opportunity of conversing with the Professor and his companions. So
+the party at once repaired to the house, where a sumptuous meal was
+provided. The expression must not be taken in too terrestrial a sense,
+for, in Atalanta, the actual amount of drink and still more of food
+would hardly, as regards quantity, have sufficed a child from the
+other planet. The native foods and drinks were practically medicines
+of a very palatable order, and were all intended to have a direct
+influence upon the bodily frame. The more exquisite the delicacy the
+more dangerous it would be to indulge too freely in it. Carmichael
+looked with astonishment at Radcliffe, supping on a small plate of some
+high-coloured substance and a slender goblet of pale rose-tinted liquid.
+
+The guests, however, had all the more leisure at their disposal for
+talk. The Professor, for their own good, told them many interesting
+facts about the earth and its ways, while Radcliffe plied others with
+questions as to the planet on which he had resolved to spend his
+remaining years of life. Andron was much interested in astronomy, and
+told the terrestrials all the main facts which the Atalantans had found
+out about the solar system.
+
+Mercury and the earth were, of course, the planets best known to them,
+and he made the sage remark that astronomers would do better to put up
+with the trouble of the sunlight and study Mercury as a morning star
+rather than face what he considered to be the far greater difficulties
+of going to the frozen hemisphere and looking at it so low down on the
+horizon.
+
+“Do you think Mercury is inhabited?” asked Radcliffe.
+
+“Certainly not,” answered Andron. “Mercury is only a repetition of our
+own planet with polar terrors on one side and a sun about three times
+larger than our sun. All our vegetation would be withered, and there
+would be but half the space which we have on which it could grow. Even
+this presupposes that its surface is all land, whereas it is probably a
+sea of fire and molten metal.”
+
+After this learned talk about the stars, to which Carmichael added the
+surprising news that there were two planets beyond the orbit of Saturn
+which the Atalantans had not discovered, the converse took a more
+religious turn. Andron and his wife Ayacatil were delighted to have
+given to them a copy in manuscript of St. Luke’s Gospel and the Acts.
+Andron promised that many copies should be circulated in the island.
+He asked Radcliffe a rather remarkable question: if the abominations
+committed upon the earth were wholly and entirely the work of mankind,
+or whether there were occult powers of evil acting upon them from
+without? When Radcliffe spoke of the teaching of Christianity upon this
+dark subject, Andron and Ayacatil both expressed the opinion that it
+was no use to deny that the Atalantans were more free from crimes of
+violence and mere insensate wickedness--in fact, that it was hardly
+possible to find people who ever did wickedness that was contrary to
+their own interests. Sins there were, and plenty, in Atalanta, but
+there was always a reason for them; there was nothing extravagant or
+maniacal, nothing uncontrolled or uncontrollable.
+
+“Surely then,” said Radcliffe, “as Atalanta has been left all these
+ages to work out its destiny on the side of good, so likewise it has
+been left unmolested on the side of the powers of evil. I do not
+believe there are such powers in this planet. This would account for
+the whole course of divine treatment which Providence has adopted
+towards it.”
+
+“This appears to me very just reasoning,” said Ayacatil; “we breathe
+a purer atmosphere in this planet, and therefore a large number of
+spiritual and moral maladies are cut off.”
+
+“But that makes us wholly responsible for those that remain,” remarked
+Mexitli. “However, I mean to look facts in the face and study all that
+God has taught the other planet, and see what light the teaching can
+throw upon this.”
+
+The Professor was about to lead the discussion back to the heavenly
+bodies, when Abercromby asked if they might enjoy some more of the
+national poetry of Atalanta and its melodies.
+
+Ayacatil pressed Mexitli to honour them with an example of her own
+artistic powers.
+
+The princess consented, and sang some stanzas of the grand lyric--
+
+
+ “HOW KERAUNION DIED”
+
+ Sing me a tale of the days gone by,
+ Of the days that were brave and bold,
+ Ere the minstrel charmed with his minstrelsy,
+ But love wrought deeds untold;
+ When to love and to succour was all our pride,--
+ In the days when King Keraunion died.
+
+ The clouds had gathered all over the hills,
+ And Asti had hidden His glorious face,
+ The rain mist had flowed o’er the trembling rills,
+ And faster the clouds did race
+ To the trysting-place whither their squadrons ride,
+ On the night when King Keraunion died!
+
+ A subject had served him right faithful and true,
+ Had stood ’mid the trustiest round his throne,
+ And the sky of the monarch was cloudless and blue,
+ And all Atalanta he called his own.
+ Ah! how can _we_ tell how events shall betide
+ When we hear of the way that Keraunion died?
+
+ For the sky of the subject was draped in gloom,
+ And his head was bowed in a sore distress,
+ And life had become as the fearsome tomb,
+ A drear and a pitiless wilderness.
+ His only child had strayed from his side
+ On the mountain path where Keraunion died.
+
+ The King set forth alone. He wrought
+ ’Mid the gathering darkness the truant to seek.
+ A courtier the tidings of anguish brought,
+ And he gave the advice of the timid and weak:
+ “For what would become of the land,” he cried,
+ “If boldness he urged, and Keraunion died?”
+
+ The King spurned the counsel, and threaded his way.
+ Unconscious of pain, and of peril sore,
+ He came to the place where the maiden lay,
+ And safe to the summit her frail form bore.
+ Now who would have thought in that moment of pride
+ That the hour was come when Keraunion died?
+
+ A bird of prey, with ravenous beak,
+ Struck at the child brought back to life;
+ But there, on the edge of that yawning deep,
+ The rescuer fought it in doubtful strife.
+ So the maid sped swift to her father’s side,
+ But the fight was over--Keraunion died.
+
+ The King fought on with fast ebbing life,
+ Driven to the verge of the beetling rock;
+ The monster watched every turn of the strife,
+ And drove in his last relentless shock.
+ From the dizzy height of the mountain side
+ Keraunion was hurled--and Keraunion died.
+
+A murmur of admiration pervaded the company.
+
+“Well, let us adjourn to the lawn,” said the royal songstress, “and
+have a little more talk upon serious subjects. We are all in the mood,
+I fancy.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXI
+
+ THE PEAK OF APTAURA
+
+
+They spent five days in the island before setting out for Aptaura.
+During this time Melanitis and Radcliffe explored in all directions;
+they roamed the woods and the glens, they sat by the waterfalls,
+they paid friendly visits to the chief people of the town, enjoying
+themselves to the utmost. It was as though they had made an unwritten
+compact that this was to be a holiday interlude. The princess gave him
+a fund of information about the Atalantan people, and taught him many
+things it was most necessary to know. Carmichael enjoyed society in his
+own way, and certainly won the hearts of the learned.
+
+Just before they started, an airship arrived from the mainland flying
+the red pennant of the palace. It bore several letters, only one of
+which need detain us. There was a sealed despatch from Mayana, which
+evidently caused Mexitli a measure of care, for she knitted her brows
+as she read it. But she did not divulge the contents, beyond assuring
+her guests that they had no cause for fear.
+
+There was a letter from Carysfort merely telling of his literary work,
+but making scantiest allusion to anything else; the Professor read it
+to the others and then put it in his pocket. But there was a letter
+from Tom which sent the whole party into such convulsions of laughter
+that it is to be wondered that they were not all of them ill. The
+example of the others proved contagious--to Melanitis, at least, for
+she could hardly retain her seat without holding on to it. The letter,
+however, was so hilariously engrossing that the terrestrials scarce
+noticed the princess’s condition.
+
+It was to Carmichael, and is worth quoting entire.
+
+
+ “DEAR MR. PROFESSOR,
+
+ “Pardon the liberty I am taking, but I thought you would like to
+ know how we are all doing. First, I’ll just say that I like old King
+ Malchon better and better. He is the dearest old genelman that ever I
+ see. He took me for a walk round the terraces, leaning on my arm, and
+ I never had no King, dook, nor baron to show me such honour yet.
+
+ “I sang him one of the hymns Mr. Radcliffe likes which he used to
+ have at his church.
+
+ “Mrs. Cleophon (I forget her Christian name) does the bigger half of
+ his business for him, and a real lady she is.
+
+ “Miss Melanitis is sure to look after dear Mr. Radcliffe, and to see
+ that he doesn’t walk the dark side of the south pole without his
+ greatcoat. Would you just tell him that he said he was going to learn
+ Miss Mexitli the art of playing chess? if he do, as soon as she has
+ learned the moves, he must be sure to let her win some of the games.
+
+ “I don’t go in for politics, but it’s myself that thinks there will
+ be a job on with them priests, for I fancy, and Mrs. Cleophon thinks
+ so too, that that old rascal Lydon is after some mischief. But if the
+ Lord will, the queens will be coming back soon, and they will finish
+ his bother.
+
+ “Now, about Mr. Carysfort. He is writing a big book on Venus for the
+ other world, and he means to give it to the Vice-Chancellor. He is
+ also going to write to Mr. Chamberlain, the German Emperor, and the
+ Prime Minister, though I think there will be a new one before we get
+ back.
+
+ “Hoping this will find you well, as it leaves us at present,
+
+ “I am,
+
+ “Your humble servant,
+
+ “TOM.”
+
+Soon the heights of Melandria faded in the twilight of the low red
+sun. They held on their way to the mainland, which they now perceived
+to be but a narrow neck of country tapering off to a point. The other
+ocean came in sight, and at last, where the land ended in a magnificent
+headland, against which the waters beat with tempestuous fury, stood a
+lonely house surrounded with high walls and rocky ramparts, to protect
+it from the fury of the southern sea.
+
+“These are the last Atalantans except upon Aptaura,” said Mexitli. “We
+will salute them and hasten on.” This they did from a height of about
+five hundred feet.
+
+Across the straits rose the warden of the frozen pole, the giant
+Aptaura, his snow-white crest gilded by the rays of the ice-bound sun,
+his mighty granite mass rising sheer out of the deep. The peak seemed
+utterly inaccessible to mortal enterprise, and so indeed it was till
+the era of the airship.
+
+Higher, and yet higher, they ascended, till the summit was scaled at
+last, twenty miles in perpendicular height. There, protected by a
+rampart of rock, nestled the Observatory, a low-roofed building with
+several giant reflectors, telescope shaped, pointed towards the sky.
+
+To the south were the frozen ice-fields, wrapped in polar darkness; the
+air was piercingly keen, the stars shone out in the black sky, and,
+near the horizon, behold, one bright, greenish-red star of incomparable
+richness and brilliance, a small glittering moon.
+
+“There is your world,” said Mexitli, pointing to it.
+
+It was the earth.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXII
+
+ THE GREAT MYSTERY
+
+
+The staff at the Observatory consisted of three men of science with
+their servants. They were elderly men who had devoted their lives
+to the study of the heavens in this region of awful isolation and
+loneliness--the highest spot by far in the whole planet. Melanitis had
+been there several times, but Mexitli only upon one former occasion.
+Both the princesses spoke the kindest words of greeting to the brave
+colony of scientific recluses, and introduced the visitors from earth.
+
+But though the Professor and his two companions were wonderfully
+struck with the grandeur of the mountain and the incomparable view,
+they quickly saw that there was little astronomical knowledge for
+them to learn that they did not already know from the more favourable
+view-point of their own world.
+
+Radcliffe was also greatly astonished to find that the Atalantan
+knowledge of the earth extended only to its larger physical
+outlines--the continents, peninsulas, and islands; but they scarcely
+knew more of the earth than we do of Mars, and not nearly as much as
+we know of the moon. The earth was a far lovelier object in the sky of
+Venus, from Aptaura, than Venus is in our sky, but it was an almost
+impossible task for any Atalantan, unless helped by the palace, to get
+there to see it. In fact, Malchon supported his astronomers out of his
+own private liberality, and men of learning assisted him in so doing.
+
+Many weeks would be required for study and observations before any
+solid results could be attained, and Mercury was far more easily
+observed from the lighted hemisphere.
+
+Mexitli therefore declared that she could not stay more than one night,
+and she contented herself with viewing the heavens from the interior
+of the Asteroid; the cold of open-air research was appalling, and she
+naturally avoided it. The next day they re-entered the region of light,
+Melanitis promising that Radcliffe should come with her to the summit
+another time.
+
+They landed at the southern end of the continent, and put up for a day
+or two at the castellated house overlooking the glorious sea, along
+the shore of which they had several excursions. Recreation of the most
+bracing type was to be obtained here.
+
+But an astounding event was at hand.
+
+The owner of the house was a brave and hardy landowner named Carminon,
+who, with his wife Mexilla, were great favourites of the court, to
+whose couriers they had rendered many a service. They had saved the
+lives of more than one occupant of a damaged or storm-tossed airship.
+On the last evening of their stay Mexilla expressed a wish to hear
+some of the melodies of Karamandra, and Radcliffe sang several hymns
+in English, and Abercromby gave them a taste of patriotic songs. But
+Mexilla wanted a Karamandran love song, and would not be put off with
+anything else.
+
+“Come, old man, you must fire away,” said Abercromby; “you have not to
+preach to-morrow, so you won’t mind getting a trifle hoarse.”
+
+Radcliffe used to sing in earlier days an old-world song called
+“Solitude,” which had been quite the rage in its time, though long
+superseded by a different style; so he began--
+
+ “It is not that my lot is low
+ That makes the silent tears to flow,
+ It is not grief that makes me mourn,
+ I weep that I am all alone.
+ The woods and winds with sullen wail
+ Tell out the same unvarying tale.
+
+ “I would not be a leaf to die
+ With none to think nor care for me,
+ Yet in my dreams a form I view
+ That thinks on me and loves me too.
+ I start--but then the vision’s flown;
+ I wake--and I am all alone!”
+
+Radcliffe rather wailed than sang the last lines. Mexilla, though not
+understanding the words, was intensely moved, and even Mexitli turned
+away her head to hide her feelings.
+
+But upon Melanitis the song had a deeper and a more poignant
+effect--she started to her feet, advanced a step towards him, and sank
+in a collapsed heap upon the floor.
+
+“What have I done!” he cried in alarm and distraction.
+
+“It is but a faintness, do not be distressed,” said Mexitli calmly, and
+raising Melanitis she, with the aid of Abercromby, carried her from the
+room. Some anxious time elapsed, and then Abercromby re-entered.
+
+“Come quickly to the Asteroid,” he said. “Melanitis is all right, but I
+must have a very serious talk with you, the most serious we have ever
+had.”
+
+Abercromby led the way to the dining-room, which they had all to
+themselves.
+
+“Now, Clarence,” he said, “pull yourself together and be calm. Answer
+me truly and clearly--is your heart loyal to the memory of your wife,
+or have you succumbed to a later influence?”
+
+“Absolutely loyal unto death, and beyond it to the Mansions of the
+Blest,” he answered.
+
+“Then you do not desire to marry Melanitis?”
+
+“Never; my love for her deepens, but it never overtakes the love for
+her that is gone, for that also grows fonder and fonder.”
+
+“Very good. This will simplify matters much. By the by, you could _not_
+have married Melanitis had you wished.”
+
+“Why?”
+
+“Because you are married already.”
+
+“I _was_.”
+
+“You _are_.”
+
+Radcliffe stared at Abercromby in dazed astonishment.
+
+Abercromby went on: “Suppose your love for your wife had faded, you
+could only have married again when she was dead.”
+
+“She _is_ dead,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“She is _not_ dead.”
+
+The words rang out like a clarion note.
+
+“What madness is this? I saw the inquest on her dead body rescued
+from the Welsh river. I accompanied the poor remains to the little
+churchyard under the Cotswolds. My own voice (how I did it God only
+knows) read the service over her to save her stricken father. And now
+you tell me she is alive!”
+
+“It is true,” answered Abercromby.
+
+“Where?” scornfully.
+
+“In Atalanta. Melanitis will restore her to you in ten days, perhaps
+less.”
+
+“You are fooling, Abercromby.”
+
+“I love you too well for that.”
+
+“Then there has been sorcery and witchcraft.”
+
+“None whatever; no such arts are practised here. You speculated truly
+the other day that the devil is limited to our own luckless planet.”
+
+“Have the Atalantans visited the earth in one of their machines?”
+
+“They lack the means of setting it going. The motive force is not
+existent in Venus.”
+
+“Have they stolen the Asteroid?”
+
+“They would not have known how to steer it beyond their own atmosphere.”
+
+“Am I to see her in the spirit or in the flesh?”
+
+“In the flesh.”
+
+“Is she changed?”
+
+“Well, yes! But forgive me if I say that _I_ consider she is changed
+for the better.”
+
+“Do you know how it has been done?”
+
+“Perfectly.”
+
+“Who told you?”
+
+“I found it out for myself.”
+
+“As you hope for salvation at the last, will you pledge me that you are
+speaking the truth?”
+
+“Absolutely, literally, entirely.”
+
+Radcliffe was staggered.
+
+“Scepticism dies hard in a despairing breast,” he went on. “Can you
+give me any tangible proof beyond your own word? Excuse me, Frank, my
+all is at stake.”
+
+“Yes! I can give you one proof at any rate. How came the knowledge of
+the English alphabet to Atalanta?”
+
+“Jackson told us he was hypnotised.”
+
+“Nonsense! Jackson thinks so, but I know better. _Your wife wrote out
+that paper with her own hands._ Jackson was put to sleep, or rather
+tempted to put himself to sleep by going too deeply into his cups. But
+this was done to rob the machine, not to study English. Your wife wrote
+the paper in a disguised hand.”
+
+“How do you know that?”
+
+“_Because she told me so herself._”
+
+Again Radcliffe fairly winced, like a man receiving a blow.
+
+“Have you had intercourse and converse with her all the time you have
+been in Atalanta?”
+
+“Certainly not, considering I was in gaol.”
+
+“When did you first do so?”
+
+“After that row in Parmenton’s house--quite recently therefore.”
+
+“Where did you see her?”
+
+“In the palace.”
+
+“Does Melanitis know her?”
+
+“Intimately.”
+
+“She hates her, of course?”
+
+“On the contrary, she has a very good opinion of her.”
+
+“Does Mexitli know of all this?”
+
+“Fully, and is very pleased.”
+
+“It is stupendous,” said Radcliffe. “Can you tell me what the Professor
+thinks?”
+
+“That you made an ass of yourself this evening. Further than this he
+knows nothing. He is even more nonplussed than you are.”
+
+“You _can_ tell me the whole secret, I suppose?”
+
+“I could, but I shan’t.”
+
+“Because of Melanitis?”
+
+“No, because of the King. Your only peril lies there. But the worst
+that can happen is this--that you and your wife may be packed off back
+to the earth. If you are, I will remain to carry on your work.”
+
+“What!”
+
+“Nothing more nor less.”
+
+“Once more, I beseech you to tell me.”
+
+“I _dare_ not and I _ought_ not, and therefore I _will_ not; you _can_
+wait ten days, man!”
+
+At that moment Minola appeared, and said: “Your excellencies are
+summoned to attend upon the Lady Mexitli; she is in sore distress.”
+
+Abercromby started. “Well, Clarence, it _may_ be that the mine is to
+be exploded now; if so, better perhaps for you. But muster all your
+courage and prepare for a stunning shock.”
+
+Radcliffe drew himself up. “Can you tell me what has happened?” he said
+to Minola.
+
+“I may not answer questions, though I would gladly if I might,” she
+replied.
+
+At that moment they reached the door of the house. Mexilla was
+supporting both the princesses, who were in a state of indescribable
+agitation. Carmichael was calm, but his face wore a very stern
+expression.
+
+“Ladies, we crave permission to know what is the matter,” said
+Radcliffe.
+
+“Atalanta is in revolt,” said Mexitli. “The priest party, aided by the
+traitors Parmenton, Mauro, and Medon, have surrounded the palace. All
+is lost.”
+
+“No, that shall never be,” said Radcliffe. “We will put all our power
+at your disposal, display the scarlet banner and fight under it by your
+side.”
+
+“By George! I thought he was a missionary!” said Abercromby. “But no
+matter, I shall not mind a fight, if it comes to that.”
+
+“Will you stand by us?” asked Mexitli.
+
+“Unto death,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“If we win, you shall be the highest noble in Atalanta,” she cried. “I
+will give to your companions an absolute pardon, and raise them all to
+the ranks of my nobility.”
+
+A cheer broke from the Atalantans present; such a scene of enthusiasm
+followed as was rarely witnessed on Venus. Melanitis kept very much
+in the background, though she spoke kind words to each and all, but
+Mexitli went and shook hands with every one, even with the Professor
+and Abercromby, a thing she had never done before.
+
+Orders were given to start at once. Carmichael, who was dead-tired, had
+to make a rush for the conning-tower.
+
+“We are in for a regular deuce of a row,” said Abercromby. “I have seen
+it coming for a long time. It will clear the air, at all events. I want
+a good square talk with you, Professor.”
+
+“Then you can’t have it. I have to run this machine at breakneck speed
+back to Atalanta, and heaven only knows what will happen to us when we
+get there.”
+
+The princess sent an imperious message that the Professor must give
+up his steering-seat to Minola and come and take part in her council.
+This he flatly refused to do, at which Mexitli took great offence,
+threatening that “under these circumstances to disobey was death.” “We
+shall all die by breaking our necks if that girl takes the steering;
+she is totally unused to it.” Minola looked very resentful, and even
+laid her hand upon her weapon; but Radcliffe quieted her by soothing
+words, and, after some trouble, Mexitli owned that perhaps it was
+better that this particular machine should be steered by those who had
+made it.
+
+Abercromby whispered to Radcliffe, “Your affair is not on just now, old
+man; perhaps it is as well. We must settle old Lydon’s bother first,
+then your turn shall come.”
+
+The council was harmonious enough, for Mexitli did all, or nearly all,
+of the talking. She decided that they must make a forced flight to
+Atalanta and observe from the air all that was going on.
+
+Not even Radcliffe could induce her to tell them how the trouble had
+begun; this she was resolved to keep to herself. All they learned was
+that the rebels had got possession of the lower part of the city, had
+burned Mayana’s mansion to the ground, and had then surrounded the
+palace hill. All the adherents of the priesthood of the Sun had taken
+up arms, and they had been joined by a large number of the lowest of
+the populace. The rebels had resolved on a complete revolution, both in
+the religious and in the social life of Atalanta.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The restless energy of Mexitli disdained to take any repose. The
+Professor grumbled that if the devil had been at their heels they could
+not have gone very much faster, but, as Abercromby remarked, since
+Radcliffe had ruled him out of all possession in Venus, it was the
+princess who would have to drive them instead.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXIII
+
+ LYDON’S REVOLT
+
+
+Sooner than they had expected, much to the delight of Mexitli, the
+well-known outline of the Keraunian hills appeared on the northern
+horizon. The Asteroid halted a mile above the city of Atalanta.
+
+“Have we your permission, lady, to alight first upon the palace
+terrace?” asked Abercromby in a tone of solemn irony.
+
+Mexitli coloured, but said: “You are pleased to be caustic, but I
+suppose you have the right. When we have taken our observations, do so,
+and you shall go unpunished.”
+
+From the upper part of the Asteroid they stepped upon the balcony and
+noticed the great commotion in progress below. Up the Avenue of Ascent
+a troop of armed men were advancing to reinforce their comrades, who
+were encamped on the ridges of the palace height. The sunlight glinted
+upon a forest of spears and lances.
+
+“They have only their primitive weapons,” said Melanitis. “They have
+been deprived of the use of the tubes.”
+
+“Let me strike the first blow, and from the sky,” said Mexitli.
+
+She pointed her green metal in a diagonal line in the direction of the
+enemy. Minola did the same. Flash after flash was sent downwards, but
+no apparent effect followed.
+
+“The range is too distant,” said Melanitis. “We must descend lower.”
+
+Slowly the Asteroid dropped by the action of the fans. Then at the
+distance of a quarter of a mile the firing was recommenced. Several
+were seen to stagger and fall; others, unable through the dazzling
+sunlight to locate their aerial foes, took to their heels.
+
+“That is Lydon,” shouted Abercromby. “He is rallying them and urging
+them to return.”
+
+Minola instantly levelled the green tube, but before it could be
+discharged a blinding flash broke from the building at the angle of
+the terrace parapet. A pyramid of fire shot into the sky; the Asteroid
+itself was rocked by the air currents, and they were nearly thrown off
+their feet. A deafening roar followed, and a thick column of yellow
+vapour hid everything for a few minutes.
+
+Mexitli clung to Radcliffe with a convulsive grasp; then she wrung her
+hands in agony. Minola gave way to a burst of tears and crying.
+
+“Tell us what has happened,” said Abercromby.
+
+“We will be with you to the last,” exclaimed Radcliffe.
+
+“I know it,” she replied, “but it may well mean that you will perish
+along with us. That building which has been wrecked is the arsenal;
+it contains all the materials for the manufacture of our weapons of
+defence. Many weeks must pass before we could possibly provide new
+material. It is now a conflict of force against a handful--ourselves
+and our friends, who will be quite defenceless, and who may be either
+starved out or stormed out.”
+
+“Send an airship to Melandria--the people are all faithful there,” said
+Abercromby.
+
+“Well thought of,” replied Melanitis.
+
+“It can be done,” said Mexitli, “but they can bring us but scanty
+supplies.”
+
+“How many times could you fire the weapons you are carrying with you?”
+
+“About twenty times, each of us.”
+
+“What has been done with our own weapons and ammunition? All this could
+be used. It would be better than the weapons of the rebels,” said
+Radcliffe.
+
+“You shall each of you be put in trust with it.”
+
+“Head for the palace, Carmichael,” Abercromby called out.
+
+In a few minutes they were on the terrace, where the palace guards were
+drawn up to repel any assault. But none such had been attempted. The
+enemy had been satisfied with their master-stroke, and fully believed
+that the day was won.
+
+Presently Carysfort and Jackson came forth with pale but resolute faces.
+
+“The King is in his cabinet; he is on his knees praying, sir,” said
+Tom. “I told him to do it by signs, and then I took off my jacket
+and my waistcoat to let him feel easy that I was ready for the other
+business.”
+
+“This palace shall be your abode, Mayana, if we only triumph,” said
+Mexitli, embracing her. “Do not despair. Our brave friends are going to
+help us.”
+
+“Suppose we go straight for the rascals just when they think we are
+hiding,” said Tom. “Rush ’em all at once; that’s my ticket. Old Lydon
+is below. I peeped over and saw his ugly old head. He is jabbering
+away, either to the sun or else to his men, only a few hundred yards
+off. Just say the word, Professor, and I’ll give him one in the nose,
+and that will end all the trouble.”
+
+Melanitis, half laughing, turned to Radcliffe.
+
+“Go to the room above the Hall of Perfect Justice. Minola will direct
+you. There are your weapons; they are all safely deposited.”
+
+“Hold steady, Tom,” cried Carmichael. “Do you think you can run at all
+those savages unarmed and alone? Wait, and don’t be a fool; we can’t
+let you throw yourself away like that.”
+
+Tom swore, but obeyed.
+
+Meantime a sharp conflict was going on in the Avenue. Missiles were
+hurled from the house-tops, chiefly by the women and children, upon
+the enemy below, and many were killed or disabled. Parmenton and his
+fellows set fire to one of the houses, and it was soon a heap of
+smoking ruins. The inmates sallied out, and, aided by their friends and
+kinsmen, pressed severely upon the rear of the attacking force. The
+arms taken from the Asteroid were quickly in the hands of the royal
+party, who needed very little teaching how to use them with deadly
+effect. The sharp cracking reports echoed around, and, with every one,
+some enemy was laid low. Then King Malchon came forth.
+
+“My daughters, I will seek to imitate the nobleness of Keraunion. I
+will lead the sallying party myself.”
+
+“Do not think of it,” said Melanitis, seeking to draw him back. “It is
+the King’s duty to direct others to fight.” But Malchon would not be
+dissuaded. He set his foot on the rocky steps. “My guards, follow me;
+let us deliver our city from these misguided traitors. God is with us;
+it is for Him we are fighting, not for our own glory only. Forward!”
+
+Mexitli called to Mayana and her sister to stand behind the parapet and
+cover their friends by an incessant discharge. At first this was easy
+enough, and many a foe was laid in the dust; but, as the two parties
+joined in actual conflict, they scarcely dared to keep it up for fear
+of hitting the King and his guards.
+
+Abercromby, Carysfort, and Radcliffe were soon in the fight, but Tom
+was the most reckless of the whole party. He had often heard Abercromby
+tell the story of Admiral Napier saying to the sailors on the eve
+of starting for the Baltic: “Lads, sharpen your cutlasses and make
+ready.” So he kept on shouting this and other watchwords, interlarding
+them with less classical language. He ran full-tilt at the line of
+spears, wrenched one out of the hand of its holder, and ran him
+through the body with it. Cleito was by his side in a moment, and the
+guards forced their way by sheer physical strength, and beat back the
+advancing line.
+
+Radcliffe was in the most imminent danger. Lydon saw him and marked
+him out for vengeance. He made unlimited promises to any who would
+bring him dead or alive. He was seized by Mauro Katakalon, and though
+he struck out with all his might, he felt his strength giving way. He
+was in full view of Mexitli, who was holding one of the Professor’s
+pistols. In an agony of supplication Melanitis besought her to fire.
+Mexitli’s hand trembled as she did so; the bullet struck the gilded
+armour of Mauro and penetrated his shoulder. More furious than ever,
+the burly giant seized the waist of Radcliffe and dragged him along
+the ground. Some one slipped a revolver into the hand of Melanitis.
+She leaned over the parapet, there was a sharp report, Mauro Katakalon
+relaxed his hold; he was killed instantly. A cheer went up, it put new
+life into the hearts of the defenders.
+
+Radcliffe, no sooner free, ran to the help of Tom, who was sore
+pressed, for he was in the grasp of three or four assailants. One of
+these was Lydon himself; he saw the day was lost, for by this time the
+population from the upper part of the city had issued forth against
+him. Malchon had scattered the foes in front, and all that remained was
+to overpower the retinue in immediate attendance upon the high priest.
+Abercromby and Carysfort had performed prodigies, and were beside the
+King warding off blows on all hands.
+
+Lydon, by a last effort, had led a furious charge upon the division
+of the guards in which Cleito and Radcliffe were posted. They were
+in full view of their friends on the terrace, who encouraged them by
+voice and gesture. The ammunition, however, was giving out, Mayana and
+Minya having been too prodigal in their use of it, though they stoutly
+declared that every shot had told.
+
+Lydon dashed his way to where the King was posted and hurled a lance at
+his head. The weapon was struck aside by Tom in full flight, but his
+own spear was splintered in doing so. In a moment he and his foes were
+struggling together upon the ground. Radcliffe, not able to intervene,
+shouted to Arniphon, Cleito’s colleague, who came running up with a
+dozen guards. But the King’s personal danger was so imminent that
+he could spare no time for anything else, and closed in a desperate
+conflict with Lydon. The priest’s attendants were dispersed like chaff,
+and Lydon, after fighting like a mad dog, as Abercromby said, for
+another five minutes, was at last overpowered and manacled. The fate of
+their leader, along with that of Parmenton and Medon, who were captured
+likewise, practically ended the conflict.
+
+The King was deadly pale and exhausted. Abercromby and Radcliffe held
+him up by each arm and assisted him to mount the steps, which were
+stained with blood and cumbered by the bodies of the fallen.
+
+“Nearly one-half of the guards are dead,” said Malchon in a tone of
+deep grief.
+
+“Your throne has been saved,” said Abercromby.
+
+“But was I worthy of it?” said Malchon in a saddened voice.
+
+All Atalanta was hushed that night. Few households were there that had
+not to mourn their dead. There were no boisterous rejoicings over the
+victory, as would have been the case on the earth, though there was an
+inward satisfaction none the less deep. In the palace all was gratitude
+and harmony. Every one had reason to congratulate every one else on
+having done something for Atalanta.
+
+Upon the travellers every mark of affection which gratitude could
+lavish was bestowed. The original sentence was cancelled; they were all
+enrolled in the highest ranks of the nobility.
+
+“This will enable us each to marry,” said Frank to the Professor.
+“There is scarce a female in Atalanta who will not be proud of you.”
+
+“Many thanks, Abercromby, and assist me all you can to realise the
+splendour of my privilege. I am just going to calculate when the earth
+will reach its nearest point to Venus.”
+
+“There are three matters pending before you start, Professor: one is to
+find poor Tom, the other to assist at the trial and execution of Lydon,
+the third to make Radcliffe happy.”
+
+“We will take them in order, if we are allowed,” answered Carmichael.
+
+That night a supper party was held in the palace. The King sat at the
+head of the table, one of his daughters on either side. Mexitli was
+radiant with delight, Melanitis dignified and outwardly calm. The
+feeling was almost too intense for words. The flattery and ceremony,
+so characteristic of Atalanta, was well-nigh absent. Tongues were at
+last unloosed, when Malchon rose and said--
+
+“Through the mercy of heaven we are delivered from the most
+heart-breaking danger that has ever menaced us or our people. Soon we
+shall be called upon to pass sentence upon such of the ringleaders
+as are in our power. But to-night let all thoughts of vengeance be
+laid aside. I would suggest that each of our friends from the sister
+planet be invited to solicit from us some token of our gratitude. You,
+Carmichael, who are the leader of the expedition, tell us what is your
+chief desire.”
+
+“Permission to return to our own planet and to communicate to our
+people whatever knowledge we have acquired here which will be good and
+useful for them.”
+
+“I echo the same wish,” said the engineer.
+
+A murmur of disappointment made itself audible.
+
+“Think not that we are ungrateful,” Carysfort went on, “but know that
+our sole object in coming was to enlarge the knowledge of our brothers
+in Karamandra. But I would, if permission be granted us to return,
+leave everything which we have brought with us in the Asteroid, except
+what is absolutely necessary for our journey, behind for the use of the
+King and his people.”
+
+“I grant you the permission to return, if when the moment which our
+astronomers deem the right one shall come, you still adhere to your
+resolutions.”
+
+“I request permission to preach the religion of Jesus Christ by speech
+and writing in Atalanta,” said Radcliffe.
+
+“You have been fully tested, my son,” said Malchon. “I and the
+princesses have long since resolved to assist you.”
+
+“As for me,” replied Abercromby in a rather breezy tone, “I have got to
+love this world. I hated it at one time, but I like it now, so I should
+be glad if you would let me stay. There is one other thing. I spoke
+rudely to the Princess Mexitli in this very hall, and I beg her pardon
+here and now. I was savage and forgot myself, and I really thought she
+meant to kill the whole lot of us.”
+
+“I am afraid I did, so I will hold you quite excused,” answered
+Mexitli; “and I am glad indeed to hear that you mean to stay with us.”
+
+Had a thunderbolt descended at their feet, the Professor and engineer
+could not have been more astounded. They had not the remotest idea that
+Abercromby was not returning with them.
+
+“He must be stark mad,” said Carysfort to the Professor--“spend
+his life in Venus indeed! Depend upon it there is some girl in the
+background.”
+
+“No there is not--I stay for Radcliffe and his wife,” replied
+Abercromby quickly.
+
+“He’s done it! I knew it would be so!” gasped Carmichael. “Radcliffe is
+going to marry the lady with the letter M. after all.” These remarks
+were whispered in English.
+
+“There is one thing I much regret,” resumed Malchon, “and that is the
+loss of the faithful servant of our friends. The rebels either slew him
+or carried him away. He was a good man and a brave, and search must be
+ordered everywhere to ascertain his fate.”
+
+The rest of the time passed pleasantly enough with interludes of music
+and song. When the guests rose it was four hours after the banquet had
+begun. The poor Professor very nearly dropped asleep at the supper
+table. Time was little reckoned in Atalanta. The terrestrials could
+hardly tear themselves away from the hand-clasps which greeted them on
+every side. Even then both Radcliffe and Abercromby had to stay yet
+another hour to talk over what steps should be taken to obliterate the
+traces of the revolt and to make the best use of the victory. At last
+Mayana said to Cleophon--
+
+“Unless you let these poor dears go and secure a period of sleep we
+shall be responsible for killing both of them. I won’t even sing them a
+song. Turn them out of the room. Do you agree to this, princess?”
+
+“Yes,” replied Mexitli; “I am somewhat inclined to sleep myself. We
+have all done a good day’s work, I think.”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXIV
+
+ THE DENUNCIATION AND THE RETRIBUTION
+
+
+Radcliffe awoke the next morning with a dull feeling of anxiety
+oppressing him. The thrilling episodes of the fight, the loss of Tom,
+the decision of Abercromby, all these had, for a while, driven away
+the dominant thought of his heart, but with the first moment of quiet
+leisure it returned with unabated intensity.
+
+Lilian was in the palace, and yet he could not see her nor obtain
+tidings of her. Dismissing the attendants who waited on him (for he
+already tasted the luxuries of the Atalantan nobility), he sought and
+obtained an interview with Melanitis.
+
+“Even now,” he said, “I do not fully know your customs, and in these
+trying circumstances I may be guilty of a great social mistake; but
+I entreat you to tell me when this suspense will be over and my wife
+restored to me, whom I have so long looked upon as dead.”
+
+“I will do all I can to hasten your wishes,” she answered, “for I
+desire it no less than you do; but there are two things that must come
+first--the trial of Lydon and his fellow-traitors, and the burial of
+the honoured dead according to the customs of Atalanta. The trial will
+be held to-morrow; for the King’s sake it will be hastened, for his
+health makes Mexitli very anxious, while the burial of the honoured
+dead will follow very quickly. You will never forget the sight so long
+as you live.”
+
+“Permit me to render to you my grateful and loving thanks for the act
+of yours which saved my life. Not even the healing of my sorrow which
+you have promised to me can efface the recollection that I owe my life
+to you.”
+
+“Mexitli did just what I did, but her anxiety lest she should do you
+hurt prevented her from doing it effectually. I had no such fear,
+because I am more practised. Surely to save a fellow-creature’s life is
+what any human being would be proud to do.”
+
+Radcliffe stood silent. How _could_ she be more practised in the use of
+a Karamandran weapon? Was there not also a measure of coldness in her
+tone? Not to be wondered at, he thought. As he stood hesitating she cut
+the knot herself.
+
+“I have much to occupy me to-day,” she said, “so you will excuse my
+detaining you further.”
+
+“Have I given unwitting offence?”
+
+“Not in the least--how could you?”
+
+Radcliffe left the apartment. As he did so, he encountered Frank in
+very earnest conversation with Mexitli and Mayana. They smiled on him,
+but he went on to the terrace and walked about wrapped in thought.
+Cleophon was there, watching the ruins of the tower of the arsenal, and
+Minya, his sister-in-law, was with him. They greeted Radcliffe warmly,
+and had a long talk over the recent explosion and the tactics of the
+rebels which had brought it about. Suddenly two ideas struck Radcliffe
+all at once, and he said--
+
+“Was any one killed by the explosion?”
+
+“Two of the guards standing as sentries,” answered Cleophon.
+
+“How many prisoners are there in the palace?”
+
+“Lydon and his associates,” replied Minya. “Three men, that is to say.
+There are no women prisoners. We did all the killing and they did the
+sinning, and they are, and will yet be, doing the suffering.”
+
+“That is an admirable assortment of parts,” answered Cleophon dryly,
+“and methinks our excellent friend and colleague is quite satisfied
+with it.”
+
+“Perfectly satisfied, since there are no ladies imprisoned,” said
+Radcliffe.
+
+Minya gave utterance to a ringing laugh.
+
+“You will soon be one of us in every thought and feeling,” she said.
+
+In the meantime Abercromby had persuaded Carmichael and the engineer
+to lay their writing aside and to come for a walk with him. The others
+agreeing, they went to a sheltered garden attached to the palace on the
+southern slope of the mount, and Abercromby gave them a startling piece
+of information.
+
+“I have had a talk with Lydon himself,” he said. “Our interview was
+hardly amicable, for he cursed me at least a dozen times, but I
+wormed a state secret out of him, which has led me to advise Mexitli
+and her intimate friends not to make the approaching trial public,
+but to try him in the King’s private apartment, with only selected
+witnesses--ourselves, of course.”
+
+“You are a pretty fellow,” said the engineer; “Mexitli hardly wants
+coaching up in these medieval ideas. I thought you were an Englishman,
+but I am afraid your prolonged residence in the Love Star has not
+improved you.”
+
+“As Lydon is certain to be put to death, it will not make any
+difference to him.”
+
+“That Mexitli will finish his goose, as the Americans express it, I
+don’t doubt,” said Carysfort; “but I tell you plainly I do not like
+this sort of thing.”
+
+“He used violent language and threats that he would say that which
+would stagger the whole kingdom, and pay Malchon out for all he owed
+him. Could I do less than tell Mexitli of this? She is not going to
+stop his tongue, she only wants the man in the street not to hear it,
+and then pass it on with amplifications.”
+
+“Has his death been settled on beforehand?” grunted the Professor.
+
+“It won’t be nice according to European notions, I am afraid. To be
+quite candid, however, I have managed to change the manner of it. The
+princess and Mayana were for giving him a cup of tea, or something
+equivalent, for his next meal; but Melanitis begged hard that they
+would postpone their intention, and I joined in with her. Now I have
+got an idea that she will regret she did not let them have their way.
+But be this as it may, or rather as it will, I did have just _one_
+shudder when Mexitli produced a small phial of amber-coloured liquid
+and showed it to Mayana. They seemed to be pretty well posted up in the
+Lucretia Borgia business, and I ventured the remark that I should have
+to take care how I behaved myself.”
+
+“I agree with you,” said Carysfort, “and I hope it may have the effect
+of making you reconsider a recent decision. What did they say?”
+
+“That it was for reptiles like Lydon to fear them, not for loyal hearts
+and true like me.”
+
+“Excellent for the time being,” answered Carmichael, “but what about
+the years to come?”
+
+ * * * * *
+
+At ten a.m. measured by earthly time, Malchon lay upon his sick couch
+in the private room of his palace, where more secret trials took place.
+By his side were Mexitli and Melanitis, while Mayana and Minya sat a
+little way apart. Radcliffe and Abercromby were next to the princesses,
+while Carmichael and Carysfort were placed nearest to Mayana and Minya.
+
+A very weary look was on the old King’s face; the recent events had
+sadly undermined his strength. Abercromby, strange to say, seemed the
+most agitated person in the whole company. Radcliffe was quiet and
+composed--a trifle bored, in fact. _His_ thoughts were far away.
+
+Presently the tramp of footsteps was heard in the adjacent corridor,
+and the high priest was led in, his hands tightly bound behind him.
+Cleito and Arniphon stood on either side of the prisoner. The face of
+Lydon was agitated by the stormiest passions, but he kept himself well
+controlled. His tall, majestic figure seemed to exercise a dominating
+force.
+
+“Mexitli, my daughter, matters are in your hand,” said Malchon. “I can
+take but a silent part. My days are numbered, and I would fain be at
+rest.”
+
+The princess turned to Radcliffe.
+
+“_You_ shall indict him,” she said. “His deeds are notorious; you need
+but say a very few words.”
+
+With a strange mixture of dread foreboding, and yet of dignified
+responsibility, Radcliffe spoke:--
+
+“Lydon, high priest of Asti, to me has this task been assigned. It
+is, as the princess truly says, needless to dwell upon it at length.
+As the minister of a better and purer faith than yours, I will not
+(lest I should be thought to speak from self-interest) accuse you of
+idolatry and superstition, though I fear you have made a bad use of the
+religious influence you have so long exercised. I accuse you the rather
+of treason against the throne and the royal house of Atalanta, both by
+machinations in secret, and at last by an open outbreak of rebellion,
+whereby the King’s declining days have been embittered by strife and
+bloodshed, and many of his loyal subjects slain.”
+
+“You can now say that in private which you threatened to say in
+public,” said Mexitli. “You may freely speak, for this is the last time
+the opportunity will be granted.”
+
+“I understand well the true nature of the words which have been
+spoken,” answered the high priest; “my heart fails me not, my courage
+does not shrink. When I _have_ spoken, it is my enemies who will be
+covered with confusion and with shame, while _I_ shall go to the doom
+appointed with the knowledge that the Sun God will not fail his servant
+in the hour of death.
+
+“Malchon, King of Atalanta, if indeed it be a King that thou art, seven
+years ago you wrestled in prayer for the life of your child Melanitis.
+You, kneeling in the Sun God’s Temple, didst presume to address another
+God than He, and didst utter words alike sacrilegious and evil. They
+were that this God of thine must needs grant thy request, and that thou
+wouldst be well content, provided only that Melanitis should recover,
+that she should bring sorrow upon thine own heart, and shame upon thy
+native land. Thy prayer has been heard, Malchon, and this day thou
+shalt know to the full what thou hast done.
+
+“She, whom thou dost _call_ Melanitis, is a Karamandran at heart; she
+careth not for thee, nor for the interests of Atalanta. She is not the
+Melanitis thou didst love in the days of old, but one as different as
+these men who come from another world differ from the men and women of
+thine.”
+
+He paused. Throughout the apartment the silence was intense. Abercromby
+leaned eagerly forward; a puzzled look crept over the faces of the
+Professor and Carysfort. Not even yet did Clarence Radcliffe evince
+excitement or interest--he had heard the story before. Mexitli and
+Mayana remained impassive and inscrutable; the King folded his weak
+hands with an air of weary resignation. Melanitis alone had turned very
+deadly white.
+
+“Courage, child, courage, all is forgiven,” whispered Mexitli.
+
+“I see before me a little house,” pursued Lydon, “in a sheltered bay in
+Karamandra. The sun is shining upon the sea. In the small guest-room a
+man and a woman are standing; they are at variance one with another.
+The woman has ceased to love the man as she did but a few weeks ago,
+though she had promised to do so for ever. Verily _I_ will be no judge
+between them!
+
+“I see before me a river with a boat making its way upstream. Two
+women are in it--both young, both handsome, as beauty is reckoned in
+their silly world. The face of one is flushed, excited, reckless; she
+takes the oar, not knowing properly how to use it. Soon a rock appears
+in mid-stream, there is a crash, the boat is overturned, both are
+caught in the eddying current. One barely saves her own humdrum life,
+the other sinks. As the waters pass over her and she is engulfed,
+her spirit perceives one by her side who bids her follow him to the
+Mansions of the Blest. Such is not her desire. ‘Clarence! Clarence!’
+she cries, ‘I will go to no land where you are not. I would refuse even
+heaven for you!’ ‘Go, then, where thou shalt one day find him,’ is the
+solemn answer, ‘and tarry for him a long time, and tarry a still longer
+time for the home that I would have led thee to. Thou wouldst resist
+the will of thy Maker and defy His appointed hour; for thy punishment
+thou shalt do so, and weep bitter tears.’ A rush and a roar seemed
+to drown all her senses, and when her eyes opened she was a hapless
+stranger in a strange and wondrous land.
+
+“And now, Clarence Radcliffe, look around and behold thy wife. Thou
+hast filled Atalanta with thy whimpering complaints, perceiving not
+that it was thine own folly that set in motion this long train of
+evils. Behold her, I say, and rejoice, as best thou mayest, in the
+sight!”
+
+“Why have you torn open a bleeding wound?” said Radcliffe passionately.
+“Where is the Lilian that I once loved so well, whose memory I cherish
+still?”
+
+“Turn, fool, turn and see her; she is sufficiently betraying herself,”
+thundered Lydon. “There stands before you May Lilian Radcliffe, a
+Karamandran spirit in an Atalantan body!”
+
+Radcliffe advanced a step towards Melanitis; she stretched out her
+appealing hands, and burst forth in the words of Anglo-Saxon love,
+which Clarence had sent to her in the world across the sky--
+
+ “One dearest vision flashed upon my way,
+ Kindling the memories of Love’s sacred past;
+ That vision _now_ is all my strength and stay,
+ While yet the lingering hours of exile last!”
+
+With a wild cry Radcliffe clasped Melanitis in his arms.
+
+“Behold them!” shouted the deep voice of Lydon; “behold the two
+serpents of Karamandra! Each has found the other. Each stands prepared
+to wreck a world that their ill-starred love may riot over its ruins!
+
+“O Malchon, understand the truth even in thy dotage! The child of thine
+heart was taken from thee seven years ago to dwell with Asti in his
+palace of solar glory, while into the vacant bodily tenement crept this
+_thing_ from Karamandra, a cursed gift from a sin-stained planet.”
+
+Carmichael and Carysfort had both risen, but they sank back in their
+seats with awestruck and blanched faces.
+
+A deep groan burst from the lips of Malchon. His head fell upon the
+couch. He said not a word.
+
+“Behold thy victory! hireling of a new religion,” Lydon shouted in a
+voice of ever-increasing bitterness. “Take to thy arms this stranger to
+thee; see if there be any resemblance in her pale foreign face to the
+love of the long ago. Ha! ha! A new courtship shalt thou have in this
+land of ours, and two dialects in which to pursue it.”
+
+Radcliffe found his tongue at last. With one arm encircling Melanitis,
+he confronted Lydon and waved him imperiously aside.
+
+“Had I found her with all her beauty marred and gone, had I visited her
+in the deepest dungeon, had I met with her an exile in a desert island,
+she would be (as indeed she is) the one and only queen of my heart. It
+_is_ a harder and more severe trial than all these things, to look upon
+the foreign face, even though it be fairer than the very fairest of my
+own world. Yet love can rise superior to every hindrance, can overcome
+every obstacle, else it were vain to talk of immortality. This is how
+I meet thy difficulties, this is how love prevails over thy logic.”
+
+“Thou hast finely spoken, O man of Karamandra,” jeered Lydon. “Thy
+rustic wife of old is now a princess, and a throne is a potent solace
+to the trials of a foreign face.”
+
+“Not when the wife sits upon a throne, and the husband is far beneath;
+not when she has power and he no power, save only to carry on his
+mission; not when she is great and he is small.”
+
+“A truce to this peddling matter,” answered Lydon sternly. “Once again
+I call upon you in the name of Asti my God, to renounce your impious
+design to change the faith of Atalanta. Do what you will with _me_, but
+let not the Sun God shine upon an apostate land.”
+
+“Had I but loved my Saviour as I loved my wife, we might, both at this
+moment, be fulfilling a lowly divine ministry in our own world; but
+_now_ we will do the one thing left to us; we will walk hand in hand
+together, to be a help and a benefit to the world wherein we are.”
+
+“I give you my consent and my blessing,” murmured the King in a broken
+voice. “God and the Prince of Heaven shall be honoured and adored, and
+none else. And now, my son Radcliffe, the time will not be long for me.
+Soon, very soon, I shall go to the land of which He whom we once coldly
+banished told us, a land where the wicked cease from troubling, and
+where the weary are at rest.”
+
+“I have _one_ thing more to do,” cried Lydon, in a voice hoarse with
+rage. “The Sun God has been publicly repudiated here in my presence,
+and his wrath must now fall upon the blasphemer who has come amongst
+us. O Asti, strengthen me only this once that I thy unworthy servant
+may perform one last sacrifice in thy name!”
+
+Bowing forward, with a supreme effort he snapped his bonds, and in a
+bound was upon Clarence and Melanitis. But Malchon sprang from his
+couch and interposed his aged body as a shield. Something glittered
+in Lydon’s hand ere his arm could be arrested in its downward swoop.
+Malchon fell forward; he uttered one faint cry; they just caught the
+words, “Let the Prince be King,” and all was over.
+
+“A greater retribution has fallen,” shouted the high priest. “I swore
+to be avenged. Behold, all of you, the sacrificial knife; see, it is
+red, red to the hilt. Asti is honoured. Come, therefore--I wait my
+long-appointed doom; do your worst with me. Asti, I come! I come!”
+
+A sharp report echoed through the room. Lydon fell dead at his victim’s
+feet. Minola was risen, holding one of the pistols from the Asteroid in
+her hand.
+
+“He shut up my father in his Temple prison,” she said quietly. “He let
+him die of starvation, because he would not sacrifice to his idol. I
+place myself in Queen Mexitli’s hands. I have repaid.”
+
+“You need not be forgiven, dear, for there is nothing to forgive,”
+answered the Queen elect. “You have only completed the sacrifice. I had
+meant something appallingly worse for him, but I thank you for having
+made it unnecessary.”
+
+Then she knelt down by her father’s side, and the tears fell fast.
+Presently she looked up and said--
+
+“Go, my friends, and take rest after all these horrors. You have
+nothing but a true friend in me. Cleito! Arniphon! take the body of
+that traitor and hurl it over the parapet of the terrace!”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXV
+
+ THE OLD LOVE AND THE NEW
+
+
+No words can adequately describe the emotions that prevailed in the
+great city when the news flew from mouth to mouth of the assassination
+of the King, followed by the almost immediate death of the murderer.
+
+Many scores of households were already bewailing their dead and making
+the usual elaborate preparations to honour their remains. And now the
+palace itself was drowned in lamentation also, and was face to face in
+addition with the problem of the succession.
+
+The latter point was very quickly settled. Fifty years had to pass
+before the nobility would have the right to raise one of their
+own order to the throne. Melanitis instantly wrote out a form of
+renunciation with her own hand, and placed herself entirely in
+Mexitli’s power. The latter took her aside, and said, in the presence
+of Radcliffe and of Abercromby--
+
+“Since you have so honourably kept your faith to me which you pledged
+two years ago, my first act as Queen shall be to associate you with me
+in the sovereignty.”
+
+“That I am firmly resolved to refuse,” she answered. “I pray that
+your cousin Mayana be raised to the first place below the throne. Also
+that Clarence may be retained in the rank of nobility along with his
+comrades. All I ask for myself and for him further is, that you will
+permit us to live in some retired spot where it will be easy for us to
+devote ourselves to the work we desire to do.”
+
+“You shall rule the island of Melandria for me, as Andron’s term of
+office expires with my father’s death. You will not disappoint me in
+this, will you, Melanitis?”
+
+“You are more than good to me,” she answered, “and if you desire it, I
+will undertake this work.”
+
+“Now that I understand everything,” Mayana interposed, taking the hand
+of Melanitis, “I honour you as I never honoured you before, and I
+sympathise with you in those awful years of trial amongst us which you
+have so bravely spent.”
+
+“And you, Clarence,” said the Queen, “though you can have no direct
+power in the ruling of this land, will find your happiness in the love
+of your wife, in the fulfilment of your mission, and in the knowledge
+of the love which we all bear to you, for you are devoting your life
+to the good of your adopted country. You also, Abercromby, will have
+your share in that love, a share which will increase, as we see that
+you completely identify yourself with us. As for the other two, it is
+_their_ fault if their share in our hearts’ affections be much less. To
+their own world they have decided to return, and it is doubtless well,
+for to it they evidently belong. I shall have a serious talk with them
+when the fitting time arrives. Meanwhile, you will all remain in the
+palace with us.”
+
+Melanitis and Clarence spent most of that day together. Their happiness
+was too great to be expressed in words. They sat in one of the recesses
+of the palace gardens looking towards the south, and each told the
+other what they had suffered in the long time of separation.
+
+“We will talk always in the dear English tongue, Clarence, when we are
+together. Atalantan has been to me a painfully acquired dialect. I do
+not speak it very much better than you.”
+
+“When did you first hear of our coming, dearest?”
+
+“I was standing on the palace terrace, and I saw the rockets soar
+into the sky. I knew it was something most unusual, and I myself
+urged Mayana and Cleophon (who were then visiting the palace) to go
+and investigate. The moment they brought back the report of their
+interview, I was certain, but,” she said with a shudder, “you were all
+of you close to death.”
+
+“I felt sure of it at the time, dearest.”
+
+“Mayana has often told me since that she can never bear to think about
+it. But is it possible that no suspicion of the truth about me ever
+reached you from any one?”
+
+“Never, Melanitis.”
+
+“You _must_ drop that detestable name. I am Lilian. But how _did_ you
+explain to yourself what Abercromby could have meant?”
+
+“By the pure miraculous power of God raising you from the dead.”
+
+“Ah! Well, of course, that would account. And yet it was something not
+far short of it.”
+
+Then she asked Clarence to tell her all about his work after he had
+returned to Oxford, and all about the Professor and his companions.
+
+“The most trying part of it to me was when you and your people talked
+away in my presence, not knowing that I could understand you. Little
+did you know how much I agreed with many outspoken criticisms, though
+they were sometimes not very politely expressed. But that song about
+the proctor, and your Atalantising of it, nearly did for me altogether,
+and then--Tom’s letter!”
+
+“There is one thing I greatly desire to ask you. Was it true, as
+Parmenton asserted, that you in any way supported them in their designs
+upon the existing social order? He actually advised me to throw in my
+lot with you, and said that you were a Karamandran woman at heart.
+Could it have possibly been that he suspected the truth?”
+
+“Quite impossible. He only took advantage of some words which he once
+heard me say in the presence of Lydon, that I did not greatly admire
+the way in which the women ruled everything here. But, of course, I
+have the right of my sex to change my mind upon this or any other
+subject. Certainly, now that _you_ have come, I must break altogether
+with any such ideas.”
+
+“I never ruled you in the other world,” chuckled he, “so I am scarcely
+likely ever to attempt doing it in this.”
+
+“Perhaps you never went the right way to work. You were sadly wanting
+in tact; but you have made amends here, at all events, when you saved
+yourself and the others from an almost certain death on the day of the
+trial.”
+
+“What will be done with Medon and Parmenton?”
+
+“Don’t ask me, Clarence. They will drop out. There will be no trial.
+Better would it be for them if I served them as I did Mauro Katakalon.
+You know that I saved the wretch Lydon himself, and how he requited it.”
+
+Radcliffe shuddered. “I do not like these things.”
+
+“Nor do I, though I cannot now see _everything_ through terrestrial
+spectacles.”
+
+“Did you know that Lydon was going to betray your secret?”
+
+“Not till the last moment. You and Frank were very wise in urging a
+private trial.”
+
+“I only did it because I fell in with his opinion; I did not know what
+was going to happen. But I am troubled about another matter. Can Clieto
+and Arniphon be depended on not to tell Lydon’s story broadcast?”
+
+“I shall leave that with the Queen; she will do what she thinks best
+for us. Do not be hard upon Mexitli or Mayana, or any others. There is
+much that ought to be corrected, but we must give them the fuller form
+of their own ancient faith, and that will work a change in many things.”
+
+“What was your feeling towards the King?”
+
+“Grief and regret. But I was quite powerless to act; it would have
+killed him to have learned the truth from _me_, even if he had believed
+it. Mexitli must have bitterly hated the true Melanitis; but she
+gradually awoke to the fact that, whatever change had passed over me,
+it was sufficient to render me her passive instrument, and not her
+rival. Little by little her enmity turned to affection, and then when
+you came, though I had certain risks to run, I felt that I might some
+day tell her everything. On that night when you sang ‘Solitude,’ I
+betrayed myself so openly that Abercromby, who had already suspected
+the truth--for I knew he did by many little things--came to me and
+taxed me directly with it. Then I told Mexitli and Mayana. The Queen
+believed it; her cousin did not. Of course, the Queen saw in a moment
+that her succession to the throne was secured beyond hesitation; and so
+we all made a firm alliance, and I myself told Abercromby to pave the
+way towards your enlightenment. Now I think I have told you everything.”
+
+“What effect has your experience had upon the truth of the theory of
+re-incarnation?”
+
+“Don’t trouble your dear head about that. One instance does not make
+a rule, especially when we can see, as here, such evident meaning
+and reason for it. It had not to do with the earth, but with Venus.
+I was not reborn, but conscious from the first of what had happened.
+Better, in one sense, had I not been, for no one knows, nor ever will
+know, but I who have gone through it, what it has cost me to be such
+an incarnated impostor. My journeys to Aptaura, etc., were not much
+dictated by love of astronomy, nor even for the sake of seeing the
+‘Little Queen of the Night,’ about which there was not much to learn
+from those wise men, or from their instruments, but chiefly to get
+away from people and talk English to myself, lest I should forget it
+entirely by the time you came.”
+
+“Was the real Melanitis older or younger than you when your change
+came.”
+
+“Older by some years, Clarence, but not very many.”
+
+“God help me,” said Radcliffe; “I hoped that it had been otherwise. I
+had hoped I might have had you a few years longer.”
+
+“You will have me as long as God wills, my dearest. We cannot tell
+beforehand any of these things; we have a work to do, and we shall be
+immortal till it is done.”
+
+“And afterwards,” he said.
+
+“Yes, afterwards, in the Mansions of the Blest. You were very fond of
+that expression; it is curious that you pitched upon the favourite
+phrase of Venus--‘Antillie--intânie.’”
+
+That evening the Professor and Carysfort had a long conversation over
+the things which the lovers had been discussing, though in a different
+form.
+
+“I perfectly believe all I have heard, Carysfort,” he said; “I do not
+trouble over a magical key, if it perfectly fits a magical lock.”
+
+“Then you go in for stark miracles and supernaturalism, Carmichael,”
+said the engineer.
+
+“No, my friend, I, in this case, go in for unknown law, unknown
+factors, unknown powers. Whether they are miraculous or not, requires
+me to know vastly more about them than I am likely to, on this side of
+the border. It is much more important to know whether a fact is true,
+than to know whether it is supernatural. I know _this_ is true, for it
+clears up everything that has puzzled us from the first; on just the
+same principle, I accept the resurrection of Christ, because I cannot
+account for what happened afterwards except on such a ground.”
+
+In the meantime, the King’s last wish that a search should be made for
+poor Tom had been carried out. He was searched for all over the city
+and the district, but no trace of him could anywhere be discovered.
+Meanwhile the agitation in Atalanta continued to increase, and at last
+a party of loyalists, more ardent than discreet, landed on the island
+from an airship, and proclaimed the Queen from the terraces of the
+Temple.
+
+They had found no one there, but Mexitli was not satisfied. She blamed
+them for going without a sufficient force, but she promised that, as
+soon as the King’s embalming had been completed, and that of the other
+illustrious dead, the Temple should be thoroughly overhauled and taken
+possession of in her name.
+
+Abercromby ventured to ask the Queen as to what ceremonies would be
+performed at her coronation. She did not quite understand him, and
+accordingly he and Radcliffe gave her an account of the coronation of
+Queen Victoria and the ceremonies in Westminster Abbey. Her answer was
+that that lady was only a queen of one small country, and doubtless had
+many enemies who needed to be convinced that she was a true monarch;
+but that when a sovereign governed an entire world, it only led to
+gossip and cavilling to have any ceremonies at all.
+
+“I put a star in my coronet,” she said, “and simply issue my orders,
+and that is all that is needed. Everybody understands; to disobey is to
+die. Medon and Parmenton have just found this out.”
+
+Two days later, Abercromby said to Radcliffe: “Where in the world are
+Cleito and Arniphon? I have missed them entirely. Have you a guess on
+the subject?”
+
+“Perhaps I have,” said Radcliffe. “Cleophon is installed in the one
+post, and Andron, when he comes from Melandria, is to have the other
+appointment. But it beats me entirely where the others are.”
+
+Radcliffe happened to mention this to the Professor, who said shortly,
+“They are going to the earth with us in order to tell our terrestrial
+people what has happened to Mrs. Radcliffe.”
+
+“Are you joking, or is this really serious, Professor?”
+
+“Really serious for them, and an abominable nuisance for us.”
+
+“Have you to take them in the Asteroid?”
+
+“Yes; I suppose it will be like the Indians whom Columbus took back
+with him to Spain, an advantage to prove that we are not impostors.”
+
+“But who the deuce contrived it?” asked Abercromby, “and what does it
+mean?”
+
+“Well, they were determined to tell their story on Venus, and Mexitli
+thought it would make less commotion if they told it on the earth.”
+
+“Where are they now?”
+
+“In gaol, poor beggars,” said Carysfort, “stewing in their own juice.”
+
+Abercromby burst out into a roar of laughter. “Well done, Mexitli!
+Catch a woman asleep indeed! I’m precious glad for Radcliffe’s sake and
+Lilian’s. Now their coast will be clear. Is not the Queen a duck?”
+
+“She is a beast,” retorted Carmichael. “Why should she cast her rascals
+on us?”
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXVI
+
+ THE FAREWELL OF AMALONA
+
+
+The hour arrived which every heart in Atalanta city had been awaiting
+with expectant sorrow--the hour when King Malchon and many hundreds of
+his people were to be carried to the Land of the Dead, beyond the Vale
+of Meloria, and there laid to rest under the shadows cast by a great
+amphitheatre of hills.
+
+Every house had brought forth its embalmed and elaborately preserved
+relic of mortality, and these were laid upon litters six abreast, each
+borne by four bearers in the open promenade between the Lake and the
+Avenue of Ascent. Each group was escorted by the members of the several
+houses to which the dead respectively belonged, while, in the intervals
+between each, bands of minstrels played melodies of plaintive pathos,
+or sang elegies commemorating the good deeds of the departed.
+
+Down the palace avenue moved the procession of the royal mourners. All
+walked on foot, the Queen and Mayana in their robes of violet--the
+Atalantan mourning hue--with all ornaments and coronets laid aside.
+
+Melanitis and Clarence walked together, for, in the eyes of the people,
+they were regarded as betrothed. Cleophon and Minya came next, while
+Abercromby, who had just donned the costume of Atalanta, walked
+sometimes with Cleophon, sometimes with the Professor and the engineer.
+The latter were of course in English clothes, feeling rather awkward
+and uncomfortable, while Abercromby said he felt like a dog running
+about between two planets.
+
+The procession itself comprised a large part of the population of
+Atalanta. There were consequently not many spectators, for none who
+sympathised in their hearts with the priestly faction would have dared
+to show themselves.
+
+Every few hundred yards they stopped and pronounced words in honour of
+the dead.
+
+A winding road had been constructed leading to the Pass of Amalona--the
+Bridge of the Tear, as it was called. This was five miles from the
+eastern end of the great city, the road turning from the shoulder of
+the Lake just where one of its two rivers flowed into it.
+
+The ascent of Amalona was severely trying; the sun of Venus looked down
+upon them.
+
+Radcliffe sank in a dead faint, but the Queen and Mayana revived him
+by a few drops of a pale blue liquid, the best known remedy for solar
+attacks. He then plodded on with grim earnestness. Melanitis watched
+him in keen anxiety. Several times the terrestrials were allowed to
+halt and take rest.
+
+At last the head of the Pass was gained, the hills receded into an
+amphitheatre, covered as far as the eye could reach with monuments of
+blue, pink, and purple stone. All were of one shape, an oval recess,
+in which the embalmed body was carefully laid, beneath an overarching
+canopy of metal and glass, which permitted the face to be seen.
+
+At the head of the Pass the royal party halted beside the effigy of
+Malchon. All the niches had been prepared beforehand, and nothing more
+was necessary than to place the embalmed bodies in the recesses made
+ready for them. On a vast pile of rock, about a quarter of a mile away,
+lay gigantic mounds (as they appeared) ranged in pyramidal form.
+
+At a signal from the Queen, Mayana came forward, and, pointing in the
+direction of these distant objects, said--
+
+“What is to be done with the dead who are not honoured but dishonoured?”
+
+“Let them be consumed out of sight,” answered Mexitli.
+
+Mayana raised the green metal tube in her hand, and pointed it in the
+direction of the heaped-up plateau. Several flashes followed, and
+instantly sheets of flame burst from the mounds, spreading sunwards in
+a canopy of fire. The cremating process, under such a sun in the full
+radiance of his light, required but a few minutes. The flames fell, the
+smoke drifted away, the holocaust was completed.
+
+This weird and awful spectacle was followed by another of solemn
+impressiveness. The embalmed body of the King was slowly carried down
+into the peaceful shadow, and the remains laid in the appointed place.
+Tears filled the eyes of the Queen and Mayana; the Queen leaned
+heavily on Radcliffe’s arm, and then she said--
+
+“From the place where we stand, a voice of average power would reach to
+most parts of the amphitheatre. You may address a word of consolation
+to us, if you are so minded.”
+
+Radcliffe was very pale, but he stepped forward, and facing the
+assembly of the living and the vaster assembly of the dead, he began--
+
+“Dwellers in the flowery land, we are here to-day to honour the memory
+of a King who loved his people, and who fell a martyr to his duty, even
+as his ancestor King Keraunion did in the days of old. His last words
+were these: ‘Make the Prince King.’ Will you obey the dying message
+of your monarch? You will perceive of whom he was speaking. Not of a
+competitor to our Queen’s throne, not of any ordinary mortal, but of
+the Divine Exile whom we, of Atalanta, served so ill in the days of
+the long ago. By the permission and help of the royal house, by the
+earnest wish of the martyr monarch himself, the Princess Melanitis
+and I are resolved to do what in us lies to publish to the Atalantan
+people the full contents of that message of peace which the Prince came
+to proclaim to the twin-worlds of Atalanta and of Karamandra. Lo! the
+way to the Mansions of the Blest is now obscure and uncertain, but the
+message which the Prince gave is clear and full of light. It shall be
+placed within the reach of all in the Queen’s empire, which is this
+world, who are ready to hear it; and then the Bridge of the Tear will
+become a portal and a pathway to a home in the Mansions of the Blest,
+where death can never make an inroad, and where, as the God of Heaven
+has promised--all tears shall be wiped from off all faces.”
+
+“Father most beloved! King most untiring for the people’s good! I bid
+you farewell,” said Mexitli, adding, “This is the most hopeful day that
+ever a sad heart beheld on the Bridge of the Tear.”
+
+Mayana advanced with the heart-shaped instrument--the antilla; she
+struck a few tuneful notes, and then the whole assembled throng
+commenced the indescribably touching and awe-inspiring chant--
+
+
+ THE FAREWELL OF AMALONA
+
+
+ I
+
+ Why have we come from the city bright?
+ Why have we toiled ’neath the torrid light?
+ Why have we climbed the irksome hill,
+ Leaving the bower and the cool sweet rill?
+ This is the last that our love can do
+ For the hearts that we honour as loyal and true.
+
+
+ II
+
+ What are our hopes on this tearful day?
+ Trembling and weak, for a sad heart’s stay.
+ How can they rise from this death-strewn vale?
+ Or snatch from the skies an enlightening tale?
+ Yet poor as they are, like the shadows that fly,
+ We will cleave to them, cling to them, till we die!
+
+
+ III
+
+ What is the grief that rules our heart?
+ ’Tis the cry of the world that will bid us depart.
+ Fain would we linger and fain would we stay,
+ ’Tis duty, not pleasure that calls us away.
+ Soon we must enter life’s tumult again,
+ Let the smile on the face hide the grief and the pain.
+
+
+ IV
+
+ Why do we gaze on the future unknown?
+ Or look to the past for the joys that have flown?
+ One is all drear with _you_ gone from our side,
+ One is all sad with Time’s onsweeping tide.
+ Only the Present lies full in our power,
+ Guarding each brief opportunity’s hour.
+
+
+ V
+
+ Can it be true that in days gone by
+ The Prince came down from His throne on high,
+ Amongst us the banner of love unfurled,
+ And laboured in vain for our new-born world?
+ That we gave Him scant welcome and bade Him depart?
+ That this is the problem of each aching heart?
+
+
+ VI
+
+ Why have the years and the centuries sped
+ O’er the world of the living, the vale of the dead?
+ Vainly we turn to the silent skies
+ To seek a response to our sympathies.
+ Whether sun shall illumine, or rain mist fall,
+ What answer comes down to each questioning call?
+
+
+ VII
+
+ All through the darkness that broods from afar
+ Our frail human love shines, a twinkling star;
+ Often and often ’tis quenched in night,
+ Ever it struggles towards hope and light;
+ Age after age it sends forth its sad cry,
+ “Give me my sure immortality.”
+
+
+ VIII
+
+ Ye honoured dead, farewell! farewell! We greet you
+ In trembling hope that we shall one day meet you!
+
+As the last notes died away the whole multitude bowed with their faces
+to the ground; then, rising, they lifted up their hands, and the cry,
+“Farewell! farewell!” rang out in its long echoes to the furthest
+recesses of the hills.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXVII
+
+ THE SACRED MANUSCRIPT AND THE PRICE PAID FOR IT
+
+
+Both the Professor and the engineer, although they were hardy men--the
+latter especially--were completely knocked up by the physical ordeal
+through which they had passed. They regretted that they had not adopted
+the native dress, for that would have helped them not a little. In
+fact, they had a very narrow escape of a serious illness. Several of
+the Atalantans themselves were stricken. Radcliffe and Melanitis had
+each to nurse the other. Abercromby went about much as usual, owing
+to his being so brimful of dash and energy. He was followed by rather
+amused smiles from many, who were quite strangers to such un-Atalantan
+activities.
+
+One day he broke in, somewhat unceremoniously, upon the Queen and the
+Princess Mayana, who were sitting, or rather reclining, propped up upon
+their couches, talking over state affairs at considerable intervals and
+pauses.
+
+“I want your royal leave to land on the priest’s island,” he said, “and
+to explore the Temple and its treasures. Radcliffe is most anxious to
+know if any documents of a religious character are hidden away there.”
+
+“What does he expect to find?” asked Mayana.
+
+Abercromby felt some difficulty in stating the case; then he said,
+“He thinks it possible that the late King’s information which he gave
+to him may have been based upon an actual writing of those who were
+disciples of Christ or even of Christ Himself.”
+
+“This is incredible,” answered the Queen. “I am aware my father thought
+that so it might be, but I think he was grossly deceived by those who
+are now proved to have been traitors and rebels.”
+
+“Lydon paid a visit to our house and repeated a story to that effect,”
+replied Abercromby.
+
+“Well, do you believe he spoke the truth?” answered the Queen. “If he
+did, it was probably on the only occasion in his life.”
+
+Mayana laughed. “It was a mere bait held out to kidnap you.”
+
+“My own opinion entirely,” replied the Queen. “Now as to your wish, I
+am ready to grant it, but I would urge you to be wise. Whatever you
+discover you must bring to me that I may see it first, as is but just,
+and you must take great care that you go with a force to protect you.
+There has been no sign of life upon the island, but some survivors of
+the rebels may be in lurking.”
+
+“Smoke has been seen rising from the Temple,” put in Minola, who was
+reading on a low seat by the Queen’s side in close attendance upon her.
+
+“All the more reason to put it out at once,” said Abercromby.
+
+“Well, you may try,” said the Queen, smiling, “but be very cautious
+for your own sake as well as for ours. Radcliffe and Melanitis may
+go too, but you must take several of the palace guards, well armed.
+Cleophon will see to this.”
+
+“I pray of you to allow _me_ to go,” put in Minola.
+
+“If you wish to, dear,” replied the Queen; “but be careful all of you.
+It will be one of the queerest enterprises you ever sought to carry
+out.”
+
+The Professor and Carysfort were almost equally interested in the
+adventure, and they obtained permission to take part in it.
+
+The next day the whole party left the palace after the noontide meal.
+They were carried in palanquins down the Avenue of Ascent to the Lake
+side, where they found six guards told off to accompany them under the
+command of Cleophon. The guards carried their swords, but Melanitis
+and Minola had each the tube of green metal. They had to proceed a
+short distance to the landing-stage, where a sort of pier projected out
+several hundreds of yards into the Lake. At the end of this embanked
+causeway a large punt-shaped boat was in readiness sufficient to embark
+the entire party.
+
+In the sky, just over the island, hovered two airships sent by the
+Queen, whose pilots were ordered to keep close in touch with them, so
+as to be able to intervene in case of any emergency.
+
+They were more than an hour reaching the island, though the rowers
+were experts at the oar. The island was about a mile in circumference,
+planted with groves of noble trees of pale pink foliage for the most
+part, here and there variegated with patches of light green. In
+the centre rose the Temple--massive, square-shaped, with its four
+minaret towers at the corners, and a shrine of rich decorative art and
+brilliant colouring in the centre.
+
+Minola, as the Queen’s personal representative, was bidden to land
+first; the others followed. The guards ranged up on the pebbly shore.
+The rowers were directed to remain by the boat, which was firmly
+secured to a metallic pillar fixed in the ground.
+
+They saw no trace of life; all seemed perfectly still. The heat was
+great, but not overpowering, as a light mist somewhat draped the face
+of the sun.
+
+Melanitis counselled that before approaching the Temple they should
+explore the wood. She and Clarence entered the shady grove and went
+across the island by a well-defined beaten track till they reached
+the opposite shore, from whence a fine view could be obtained of the
+Keraunian hills. He told her of how he had first seen through the mist
+the outlines of the Temple and the towers of the city, and how the
+anxious consultation had been held which had led to the signalling by
+the rockets. She remarked that, under the actual circumstances, it was
+the best thing they could have done, for, had they come direct to the
+city, certain and swift death would have awaited them.
+
+“Where are all the others?” said she, turning round. “They will think
+we have accidentally run away.”
+
+“No; we have run away by design, not by accident,” replied Clarence.
+“We can tell the truth, as they are not here to listen.”
+
+“Well, that is nice. I see you are the same naughty boy that you were
+on the earth.”
+
+Clarence had no time to rebut the accusation, for a sudden cry was
+heard, and Abercromby was seen running towards them, white as a ghost.
+
+“What is the matter?” said Radcliffe, alarmed.
+
+“I have just roused up some inmates of old Lydon’s menagerie. There is
+a cave of huge serpents hard by here, and they have made me run for my
+life.”
+
+Melanitis drew her green tube and held it in readiness. A minute later
+voices were heard, and Carysfort and the Professor came in sight. They
+stopped aghast, for a sinuous and silvery form, with huge convolutions,
+detached itself from a large tree and confronted them, uttering
+piercing hissings that more resembled sobbing cries. Melanitis and
+Minola, who had hastened to rejoin her, discharged the lightning fluid
+full in the face of the monster, which collapsed in a heap upon the
+ground.
+
+“This is the first serpent we have seen in Venus,” said the Professor.
+“I wonder if it be poisonous.”
+
+“They are very rare,” replied Minola, “only dwelling in the wildest
+parts of the continent to the north and the east of the city. This has
+been brought here for a purpose.”
+
+“Something ghastly, I expect,” said the Professor.
+
+“I think so,” answered Minola.
+
+Cleophon and the guards now came up. They had seen two other similar
+reptiles, but of smaller size, and their weapons and numbers had soon
+scared them into the thicket.
+
+Under these circumstances they decided to leave the woods and to
+ascend the steps of the Temple. This they did, and found the gilded
+door which gave entrance to the great courtyard. No sooner had they
+entered than they stopped in astonished surprise.
+
+A priest of the Sun, in his gaudy robes, was standing in front of the
+altar, from whence the smoke of a recent sacrifice was ascending. His
+tall, gaunt form exhibited no sign of fear. Slowly his gaze travelled
+round the whole group, but the result was only a flush of deepening
+hatred upon his face.
+
+“In the Queen’s name, I bid you surrender and throw yourself upon the
+royal clemency,” said Radcliffe, stepping forward.
+
+“Be careful, Clarence, be careful,” said Melanitis appealingly.
+
+Another step she was by his side, her arm outstretched with levelled
+weapon towards the foe, who broke into a taunting laugh.
+
+“Asti shall yet be avenged on you and yours,” he cried. “You have slain
+the high priest by entrapping him, and after a pretended trial, which
+you dared not hold in the light of day, you have murdered him in cold
+blood, because he accidentally slew the incapable monarch who was the
+slave of his own children.”
+
+“This is Talmon, he who put my father to the torture,” cried Minola.
+“Your day has come, as it came just now to your chief.”
+
+She pointed her green tube.
+
+“A moment,” interposed Cleophon, arresting Minola’s hand. “Do you admit
+or deny the charge, fellow? Was it through you that the brave Marcon
+perished?”
+
+Not a word did the priest say. The sudden accusation of Minola
+paralysed him.
+
+In an instant the deed was done.
+
+All opposition seemed to have ended with the fate of Asti’s solitary
+worshipper. The party, entering the inner shrine, found it quite empty
+and deserted. There was a circular aperture in the roof to let the
+sacrificial fumes ascend, and a huge silver-coloured altar beneath.
+
+“Have animal sacrifices ever been offered here?” asked Carmichael.
+
+“They have,” said Minola.
+
+“Anything worse?”
+
+“God knows; there was nothing that Lydon might not do,” she answered.
+
+Melanitis had been examining some mural paintings upon the northern
+wall, when she all at once stopped and stood perfectly rigid.
+
+“Come here, all of you,” she said in both English and Atalantan.
+
+They hastened towards her. “Put your ear to the wall, Clarence; do you
+not hear somebody calling?”
+
+Radcliffe did so. “Good heavens! it is an English voice,” he cried. “It
+is saying, ‘Help me! help me! for Christ’s sake!’”
+
+“So it is,” Abercromby almost shouted, “and I know whose it is, by
+George! It’s Tom, as I’m a living man!”
+
+Carmichael began to shout, “Tom! Tom! steady, Tom; we are coming to
+save you!”
+
+“Buck up, old man! Where are you?” sang out Abercromby.
+
+Melanitis pointed out to them that their best chance was to go outside
+the shrine of the Temple and search for some underground passage.
+
+“My lady,” said Minola, “I must best know the secret ways of these
+reptiles. I have been dragged here and almost done to death.”
+
+“We put ourselves in your hands, dear,” said Melanitis.
+
+Minola struck one of the panels of the walls after taking a careful
+note of it. The panel flew back and disclosed a winding stairway.
+
+“Be very careful, my lords, all of you,” said Minola. “Follow me--I
+will descend first.”
+
+The brave girl went in front, the others followed. About twenty steps
+revealed a dark passage with a glimmering of light at the end. Entering
+this they heard the cries much plainer.
+
+“Christ save me! Let me see a face of man before I die.”
+
+Carmichael dashed forward; he turned a corner, the passage opened into
+a little room, with a slit for window and for ventilation, and a stone
+floor.
+
+On the floor, his hands and feet closely fettered, his face emaciated
+from hunger and thirst, lay a prisoner. It was Jackson.
+
+The moment he saw them he made a violent effort to rise, but it proved
+hopeless; his head and limbs fell back. But a smile was upon his honest
+though tortured face as he turned towards his master.
+
+“Well, Tom, old fellow, what have these devils been doing to you? We
+never imagined you were here. The last of them has been killed; you
+will be free in a few minutes.”
+
+“Aye, I shall be free, sir, but not as you think,” said Tom. “I’m going
+home, I am. The priests--they tried to make me give my Saviour up and
+worship their pagan idols instead--told them I’d die first. Then they
+played all their conjuring tricks on me, and they have done it by now.”
+
+Melanitis knelt down by his side and laid his poor head upon her arm.
+“We hope to save you yet, Tom; but if not, you know the way home, don’t
+you, my poor fellow?”
+
+“Ay, if I had to walk it! I’d be a sight of years over it, and miss
+the harbour lights at the last, but Christ will just send a chariot to
+fetch me. He has done it all. It’s not my love to Him, it’s His love
+to me--that’s what they used to tell me over at the Methodist chapel I
+had got to lean on. But,” he went on with a puzzled look, “how _do_ you
+come to speak English, Miss Melanitis?”
+
+“I have learned it, Tom, a good long time.”
+
+“Then you must have heard me a-cussin’ and a-swearin’ pretty often,
+miss--and at your people, too. I have been a bad dog, miss, and in two
+worlds; but I have asked the Lord to forgive me, and I know He will,
+because He says so. ‘Whosoever’ is a big word, and it takes in me, you,
+and anybody else, miss.”
+
+Melanitis drew from her pocket a tiny phial and placed it to his lips.
+In a moment his vital powers flickered up.
+
+“I’d be singing you all the Glory Song if I was strong enough,” he
+said. “I heard Torrey and Alexander do it when I was in Birmingham.
+It was my old mother who converted me though. She lived at Elton, and
+when I drove over Mr. Radcliffe to a meetin’ at the Rectory, I went to
+have a cup of tea at the cottage. ‘Tom,’ she used to say, ‘I’m soon
+going, my boy, but I’ll be there to meet you; promise me that you will
+be coming. You won’t disappoint me, Tom?’ Now I’m going to her, Miss
+Melanitis, and I wishes Mr. Radcliffe and you all the blessin’ the Lord
+can give you.”
+
+Minola kneeled down and gently placed another Atalantan cordial to his
+lips. But this time there was no hopeful result.
+
+“He is dying,” said Radcliffe. “You are a martyr, Tom, and you are
+going to be crowned.”
+
+“It’s Christ and my old mother I want to see, sir. I’m not good enough
+for crowns.”
+
+He stretched out his lacerated hands to Carmichael. “Good-bye, best
+master I ever had except Jesus. You must all come--I want to see
+you all up yonder. They told me--Methodist chapel--not my love to
+Him--but--but, His love to me, that will carry all the way. Mother!
+mother! your happy son!” And he yielded up his last breath like a child
+going to sleep.
+
+Professor Carmichael, the tears trickling down his cheeks, rose up and
+said to Cleophon, “Will you intercede for me to Queen Mexitli, that the
+dead body of this my friend and comrade may be embalmed and lie beneath
+the Pass of Amalona?”
+
+“It shall be honoured as though it were one of our own illustrious
+dead,” said Cleophon. “Mayana, my wife, will have more than enough
+influence to procure this.”
+
+The guards were summoned, and the dead body was placed upon a hastily
+improvised litter and carried down the Temple steps to the boat. Just
+as they reached it, a piece of paper dropped from the pocket of poor
+Tom’s waistcoat.
+
+Radcliffe snatched up the paper, and at once cried out, “I must return
+to the Temple; there _are_ documents after all.”
+
+He handed the scrap (which was crumpled and very hard to decipher) to
+Carmichael, who read out these words: “If any of you come to find me,
+remove green flagstone under altar. Lydon has hidden papers there--the
+devil will do you some mischief there, be careful, go armed--Tom.”
+
+Carmichael read this again very carefully, and explained it to the
+Atalantans as well as he could. All agreed that they must undertake the
+search in united force, except that the rowers must be left to guard
+Tom’s remains in the boat, lest any further outrage should be attempted.
+
+Melanitis suggested that they should proceed at once to forcibly remove
+the altar, which work did not detain them as long to accomplish as they
+had expected.
+
+The lifting up of the great stone, however, required the labours of
+nearly the whole party. Below was a cavernous recess. Minola lighted a
+small lamp, and held in her other hand her deadly weapon. There were
+about a dozen rough steps to the bottom, but they were protected by a
+small handrail.
+
+Clarence, despite the warnings of Melanitis, went down first. No sooner
+had he reached the floor than they all uttered a cry, which was at once
+followed by a fierce roar and the sound of a desperate scuffle. Pinning
+him against the damp wall was a beast of large size, standing upright,
+tearing at his shoulders with its claws.
+
+Minola dared not fire at such close quarters with the lightning
+fluid; it would have meant almost certain death to Radcliffe as well.
+Melanitis had one of the Asteroid pistols, and this she discharged.
+The bullet wounded the animal severely, but did not actually kill it.
+It rolled upon the floor, dragging Radcliffe down with it in its fall.
+All that she could do was to wait while the combatants wrestled, until
+the beast was uppermost, and could present a target. With a desperate
+effort Radcliffe succeeded, by grasping its neck, in beating the
+creature back from his face, and then Melanitis got in her second shot
+with the other undischarged barrel. This struck the creature in the
+head; it bounded back and fell lifeless.
+
+The Professor and the engineer held their companion in their arms and
+assisted him to rise. His dress was torn almost to tatters, and he had
+been lacerated in both shoulders by the creature’s talons. He could
+only, with great pain and difficulty, make them understand that he had
+seen a small metallic case in a recess by the wall, in the attempt to
+reach which the beast had leaped upon him.
+
+It was a sad party that made their way to the boat with the dead body
+of poor Jackson and the wounded form of Radcliffe. Minola carefully
+examined the wounds, and gave assurance that they were not dangerous;
+but they were troublesome, and would disable him for a little time.
+
+Melanitis tended him with the most loving care. They were all glad to
+find themselves safe in the shelter and amid the comforts of the palace.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+ THE MESSAGE FROM THE OBSERVATORY
+
+
+The Queen listened with deep interest to the account which the party
+gave her of their sad adventures in the island. She acceded at once
+to the Professor’s wishes with regard to the burial of his faithful
+servant. Five days later the embalmed body of Tom was conveyed to the
+amphitheatre below the Pass of Amalona, and was laid there to rest amid
+the grief and regret of all the members of the palace. The Queen had a
+monument in the English style erected over him, and words of esteem and
+affection were inscribed in both languages.
+
+The English part of the inscription ran thus:--
+
+ To the Memory of Thomas Jackson,
+ Faithful servant to the great
+ Terrestrial Expedition of the
+ Twentieth Christian Century.
+
+ He suffered martyrdom in the heathen temple for refusing to offer
+ sacrifice on the altar of the Sun God.
+
+ “To him that overcometh
+ A crown of life shall be;
+ He with the King of Glory
+ Shall reign eternally.”
+
+The verse was repeated in Atalantan poetry, written by the Queen
+herself.
+
+Abercromby asked that the Temple might be destroyed, while Radcliffe
+wished it to be converted into the first building for definite
+Christian worship in Atalanta.
+
+Mayana urged, however, that, as a standing monument of rebellion and
+of treason, it ought to be burned to the ground. The four towers were
+spared for their artistic beauty. On the site of the Temple itself it
+was decided to erect a palace for the Queen and her colleague, while
+Mexitli gave Radcliffe permission to have a building erected in the
+upper part of the city for Christian worship and teaching as soon as
+matters were ripe for so decisive a step.
+
+One day, shortly after his recovery, Minola was standing on the upper
+parapet of the terrace, looking fixedly at the blackened ruins of the
+Temple. Radcliffe asked her where Marcon had been laid to rest; he had
+looked for his monument, but had not found it.
+
+“My father has suffered the last outrage which can wound the heart of
+an Atalantan,” she replied. “After they had put him to death, Lydon had
+his body cremated upon his idolatrous altar. I wish I could know for
+certain whether he was actually dead when they cremated him.
+
+“When I was left desolate the Queen took me into her service, and
+I have had my home with her ever since. My father was a steadfast
+loyalist, and disdained the overtures that were made to him to win
+the pretended independence they offered, and that was why he suffered
+what he did. But I have repaid.” Then she said abruptly, “Would your
+religion approve my killing Lydon?”
+
+“Your slaying a man who was in the condition of a wild beast, loose
+among people practically defenceless, was quite blameless. He would
+have killed Melanitis had you not killed him. Your slaying of Talmon is
+less excusable, for I am of opinion that the Queen ought to have tried
+him in the usual way, and he would certainly have been condemned for
+high treason.”
+
+“The Queen said as much to me. I love the new religion, or, as some
+call it, the old one, very much, and read your manuscripts as fast as
+they appear; but I have read far enough to understand that Christ was
+not only a Saviour but a Master--at least in your world, and I suppose
+it ought to be so in this. I wonder whether He could so change me as
+to make it possible for me to cease to hate those men? Perhaps Marcon
+himself, in the Mansions of the Blest, would wish me to do so.”
+
+The conversation was ended by the appearance of Mayana, who took
+Radcliffe aside, as she had something of importance to communicate.
+
+“The box has been opened which nearly cost you your life to obtain, and
+the Queen and I have carefully perused its contents. It contains an
+ancient scroll (not very legible, I must confess) which simply repeats,
+in almost identical words, the narrative which King Malchon, who had
+learned it by heart, evidently related to you. It closes with the
+parting message of the Prince to our people, while on the other side
+are some extracts, written by His disciples, two of whose names are
+given--Calchon and Ixtilon--quoting certain sayings of their Master.
+These sayings are almost a transcript of those which are found in the
+book given to your own world, so that we have a strong proof of the
+authenticity both of them and of yours. He evidently gave to your world
+certain maxims of truth about God and duty which He had before given to
+us; and, indeed, if His teaching was divine, as I believe it was, there
+was no need for originality or change.”
+
+Radcliffe went to the Queen’s apartment, where he found Melanitis
+turning the sentences into English as the Queen dictated them to her.
+
+“A very few days’ labour will suffice to translate the whole
+manuscript,” said the Queen. “Let your companions take a translation of
+it to their own world, and let our own version be circulated all over
+our empire. I will have the Prince’s last appeal to be engraved on a
+tablet and set up in a public place, say, on the promenade by the Lake
+shore, where that hateful procession was paraded.”
+
+It was several days after this that Carmichael and the engineer
+received an urgent summons to attend upon the Queen in her cabinet
+room. The time was gone by when such an announcement aroused fear and
+alarm. They had not a more sincere friend in Atalanta except Melanitis,
+if indeed she were an exception, for, try as they would, they could
+hardly conceal a certain feeling of uncanny repulsion when in her
+presence.
+
+Nevertheless it was with great curiosity that they obeyed a more than
+usually categorical citation.
+
+When they got in, a select conclave was assembled. Around the canopied
+throne sat Radcliffe and Melanitis, Abercromby, Cleophon, and Mayana
+and her younger sister, while Minola was on her usual seat, close
+beneath the throne, bending over a map of the heavens, which she was
+intently studying.
+
+“I give you greeting, my friends,” said Mexitli, a little
+ceremoniously. “A messenger has arrived from the Observatory on
+Aptaura, informing us, in reply to our recent enquiry, that your world
+will be in correct alignment with ours on the twentieth day of the
+month Cayamarca--that is, fifty-five days from now. We notify this to
+you, as it would be well for you to start on your great journey home
+five days before that date.”
+
+There was deep silence. Melanitis took Radcliffe’s hand in hers.
+Abercromby fixed his eyes on the ground a trifle awkwardly. Then
+Carmichael said--
+
+“Have we permission from your Majesty to depart?”
+
+“Certainly, after you have agreed to certain conditions which we have
+been carefully considering. Do you still wish to leave us?”
+
+“We have a duty to perform to our brothers whom we have left behind,”
+said Carmichael.
+
+“Very good; so shall it be. Now these are the conditions: You must give
+us in writing an exact account of your secret; you must either promise
+to reveal it to none of your race, or, if you prefer it, you must
+plainly tell them that it will be certain death for any Karamandran to
+come to our world as you did, or in any other way. If you yourselves
+choose to return to us you may do so, but even this on condition only
+that you thenceforward live amongst us and return no more. This you may
+do if you desire it, and you shall resume the privileges of nobility
+which my father gave you.
+
+“These conditions may seem hard, but I have to think for the good of
+my people. I have asked Clarence to tell me plainly all about his
+world, promising beforehand that nothing he revealed shall be used to
+your own injury. Melanitis is now able to confirm all he says, and
+Abercromby also, and they have told me the whole truth in the minutest
+particulars. Knowing it, I have decided to cut off for ever all
+personal communication until God shall otherwise ordain. But I grant
+you leave to take with you in the Asteroid products of our world of
+every sort, that your people may benefit by our music, our poetry, our
+arts, and even our fruits and flowers. In return, you will leave with
+us all the contents of the Asteroid which are not indispensable for
+your safety, and you may freely replace them by anything of Atalanta
+you may wish to bear away.
+
+“Fifty days from now you will set out from the palace, and we will
+journey with you to Aptaura, from whence you will wing your final
+flight.”
+
+“We agree to all these conditions fully and faithfully,” answered the
+Professor and the engineer.
+
+“As to Cleito and Arniphon, it is essential for the happiness of our
+beloved sister, that, as they have refused to promise silence as to
+her secret of identity, they must pay the penalty. They have chosen to
+be more loyal to the late King than he was to himself, and therefore
+I had decided, with great reluctance, that they must die, though by a
+painless death of sleep. But Melanitis made a powerful appeal to me,
+and it seemed more just to take advantage of a position so unique,
+and to let them go back with you to the earth. They will be good and
+faithful servants to you, and, furthermore, will absolutely prove to
+your brother scientists the truth of your history. It will enable me
+to spare their lives, and yet to help and to benefit _you_. Of course,
+I do not force them upon you, but the only alternative must be what I
+have said.”
+
+“We accept, of course,” said Carmichael. “But there is one question
+I would ask of your majesty--Will you permit us to make a strong
+endeavour to induce our brother Abercromby to reconsider his decision?”
+
+“Certainly, make all the effort you can; but I think if two planets
+have a tussle over him, I know which will be the victor,” said the
+Queen, smiling.
+
+“You will stay with us, won’t you?” said Minya pleadingly.
+
+“I shall have a bad quarter of an hour with the Professor,” replied
+Abercromby.
+
+Now that the end was in sight, every one worked with indefatigable
+industry. The Professor and the engineer were inflexibly resolved to
+go; it was no use denying that they did not, and never probably would,
+feel they could make a home in Atalanta. It was not the world for them,
+nor did the voice of duty call them to put up with it. But they took an
+immediate resolve to leave behind them a legacy of useful knowledge
+to the Atalantans; everything--books, instruments, tools, seeds,
+down to the piano and the chessboard, were made over to the palace
+and its occupants. Carmichael took the trouble to write a number of
+short essays on various social and political subjects, while Carysfort
+explained a great many mechanical and industrial arts.
+
+Meanwhile a religious revolution was beginning to spread over the
+empire. The New Testament was rapidly finding its way into the homes of
+the people, though here and there opposition and even hostility were
+manifested.
+
+The movement was, of course, purely elastic and invertebrate as yet;
+the time for the setting up of institutions and stated worship had not
+yet come, and the Professor told Radcliffe that then his troubles would
+begin. He had better enjoy the literary, poetic, and romantic epoch as
+long as he could.
+
+The Queen and Mayana did not take an openly active part, but all their
+influence was thrown into the scale. The only point in which Mexitli
+was disinclined to show sympathy was the haranguing of the people in
+open-air assemblies; this was an absolute anomaly in the country,
+except in days of sedition and revolution.
+
+At last, after several attempts which had not been very successful,
+Radcliffe yielded to the Queen’s earnestly expressed wishes, all the
+more readily because she did not enforce them by arbitrary power.
+Melanitis, moreover, came to the rescue by a very ingenious suggestion.
+Poetry was constantly sung and recited in the public promenades: why
+should not the flower of English hymns he turned into Atalantan verse
+and adapted, sometimes to the music of one world, sometimes to that of
+another?
+
+This proved a notable success; in every district the idea was acclaimed
+with enthusiasm. The Queen was so delighted that she promised to take a
+personal share in the composition of both music and verse.
+
+Thus, to cite but one instance, an ancient hymn to the Sun God was
+modelled in a new setting:--
+
+ Look not to me, but turn to Him who set
+ My throne above your far extending sky;
+ He, my Creator, never will forget
+ To listen to His humblest creature’s cry.
+
+ Unseen, He rules the Mansions of the Blest,
+ The Sun of worlds more glorious and more great,
+ From whence the Prince came down to give you rest,
+ And soon will make you heirs of His estate.
+
+ Let not the viceroy intercept the King,
+ Nor yet the creature vaunt an arrogant claim;
+ Look to the throne from whence all mercies spring,
+ And seek them in the banished Exile’s Name.
+
+“I tell you what it is, Radcliffe,” said the Professor; “thanks to a
+marvellous conjuncture of events, you are walking on roses just now in
+your missionary crusade, but the thorns will come, and will have to
+come. I don’t know much about these matters, but you are running ahead
+too fast. I shall not be here to see it, but allow me as a friend, who
+has a different mission to fulfil, just to observe that if Christ is
+ever to be King of Atalanta in any sense intelligible at present to
+me, He will have to be an Atalantan Christ. Let these queer people,
+who are more after your taste than mine, go their own way and walk in
+their own customs; let the Queen be the despot she really is, despite
+all her smiles; let her rulers and workers rule and work for the bodies
+of their subjects, and do you be satisfied, and your remarkable consort
+also, with looking after their souls. Don’t touch anything else,
+stick to doctrines for the present. You had better give them a poetic
+version of the Athanasian Creed than ask them to substitute crimson for
+sky-blue, and so on. Don’t think me blasphemous, you will find there is
+sense in what I say, though I am not an interplanetary parson.”
+
+Carmichael also made one effort, and only one, to induce Abercromby to
+return with him.
+
+“Radcliffe can do without you, for he has got Melanitis. Melanitis can
+even more easily do without you, for she has got _him_. I don’t think
+you are quite cut out for a missionary, for I believe you would ask
+the last surviving sun worshipper in Venus why the deuce he wasn’t
+a Christian. Mexitli doesn’t want you to give her a helping hand in
+politics, and, if I were you, I would not offer it. Now, Abercromby,
+just use your imagination for a minute. Can’t you see yourself looking
+up at the sky and wishing you could get a peep at the old Asteroid? It
+will be too late then, Abercromby.”
+
+“But, Professor, I’m beastly sorry, as Gilbert Rice said to me when I
+had to go down, but really--there, it is no use making a fuss. It had
+better come out. I’ve been and gone and done it.”
+
+“What am I to understand by this?”
+
+“Why, I have popped the question to Mayana’s dear little sister
+Minya, you know--we are awfully sweet. We shall be up to the level of
+Melanitis and Clarence if we only try. We mean to. So now I will retort
+your accusation as to my unclassical language, and ask, ‘Where the
+deuce do _you_ come in, Professor?’”
+
+“Good-night, Abercromby, I’m off to bed,” said Carmichael.
+
+ * * * * *
+
+There were two subjects that greatly interested both the Professor and
+the Atalantan court. One was the exploration of the eastern side of
+the continent, the other the far more daring problem of interplanetary
+communication.
+
+Carmichael and Carysfort went in the Asteroid on their own account on
+a journey of about 350 miles from the vale of Meloria to the eastern
+coast-line. So fully were the terrestrials now trusted that they
+were left to travel by themselves, with the understanding that they
+would return to Atalanta in a fortnight’s time. Neither Radcliffe nor
+Abercromby accompanied them, the latter saying that they would have
+plenty of opportunities for exploring all the habitable parts of Venus.
+
+“That is nonsense,” replied the Professor. “You cannot even wait till
+my back is turned for beginning your love-making with Minya. Clarence,
+I admit, has some arrearages to make up.”
+
+Cleito and Arniphon accompanied Carmichael and the engineer, for they
+were now counted as terrestrials.
+
+The other matter, that of interplanetary signalling, greatly exercised
+the minds of all the learned in the empire. Andron, the ex-governor
+of Melandria, who was in constant touch with the recluses on Aptaura,
+begged that the Queen would allow the travellers to earth to spend a
+few days in the island. Leave was granted, and it was settled that on
+the first day of the month Cayamarca the start from the city should be
+made.
+
+The travellers returned from their eastward explorations. They had
+found the scenery very rich and beautiful, and they had stayed at
+several country houses in the first hundred miles of the journey. The
+coast scenery had been very grand, though they once encountered a
+severe storm.
+
+
+
+
+ CHAPTER XXIX
+
+ THE FEAST OF FAREWELL
+
+
+On the first day of the new Atalantan month a great banquet was held in
+the hall of the palace which was long remembered in Atalanta and called
+the Feast of Farewell. All the notables of both the court and the city
+were present by the Queen’s invitation.
+
+The Queen and the princess-elect, Mayana, sat each upon their throned
+and canopied couches at the head of the hall, with Melanitis and
+Radcliffe on the right hand and Abercromby and Minya on the left. Below
+them the Professor and the engineer occupied the seats reserved for
+distinguished guests.
+
+Ranged around the hall were the guards and attendants who waited upon
+the guests, led by Cleophon, who was resplendent in the dress and
+accoutrements of his new position.
+
+The little tables in front of each, richly inlaid with precious metals
+and carved with quaint design, were laden with the choicest delicacies
+of Atalanta and with slender goblets of tinted liquids. Festoons of
+flowers in every hue sparkled and glistened upon the walls. Panels were
+slid to and fro to admit streams of radiant sunlight to gild various
+parts of the banquet-room.
+
+From other parts, usually those that were left in shadow, there
+came siren strains of the most bewitching music, now rising, now
+falling, now ascending to a volume of sound, now dying away in a
+distant harmony. When any speaker rose to speak there was an instant
+hush. Poetry and song were frequently introduced; on that occasion
+terrestrial melodies were loudly in demand, particularly those of the
+more romantic type. Abercromby and Radcliffe had brought some such in
+the Asteroid for the benefit of the former, as the latter could not
+play, and had not much capacity as a songster. One was the Invitation
+Song, and another a religious ballad, “I will give you rest.” Melanitis
+had turned both of these into Atalantan verse, and they were both sung
+to a number of instruments, and produced a deep impression upon the
+audience.
+
+“Love launched a fairy boat” was a song beyond the power of Radcliffe
+and Melanitis to sing--the memories were too heart-searching for them;
+but the music was played, and, from the very fact that it was so
+different from the weird and Oriental-like compositions of Atalanta,
+it excited the more surprise and interest. The national airs of the
+different European countries were performed, but these, for the most
+part, were less popular.
+
+After all this had lasted awhile the Queen rose from her throne and
+addressed the vast assembly.
+
+“Friends and notables of the Flowery Land, it has been customary
+from time to time, especially before setting out for our southern
+progresses, for the princes of Atalanta to gather the chiefs of their
+people together. Never within the memory of the oldest here present
+have we had an occasion parallel to this, either by reason of the
+shadows of the past or the extraordinary circumstances of the present.”
+
+The Queen then detailed the late insurrection, paid a warm tribute to
+the loyalty which had saved her throne, extolled the goodness and the
+benevolence of the late King, and asserted her own desire to follow in
+his steps and to try to do for her people what he had done.
+
+Then she said: “My sister Melanitis has long desired to be relieved of
+the highest cares of state, and, by her own act of free choice, has
+besought me to associate her cousin rather than herself in the direct
+and central rule of our empire. She will, therefore, occupy the less
+onerous post of ruler of our island of Melandria, by whose people she
+has for a long time been greatly beloved. Her betrothal to him whom we
+once called the stranger from Karamandra, but who is now, for the great
+services which he has rendered to us, enrolled in the highest circle of
+our nobility, has been recently announced to you, and ere they take up
+their residence in the island their union by marriage will have been
+formally ratified by us. It will take place after this assembly has
+been dispersed, in the presence of the usual chosen witnesses.”
+
+Neither Radcliffe nor Melanitis had been told that matters were quite
+so imminent, and they exchanged glances. Abercromby managed to slip a
+piece of paper into Radcliffe’s hand. “Thought I would get all your
+business over at once, old chap. I fixed it up before the meeting.
+Don’t turn this into poetry, please!”
+
+“Most earnestly do I desire that the blessing of Heaven may rest upon
+them,” said the Queen, “and upon their efforts to do my people good.
+I wish all to know that I publicly sanction these efforts, and that
+I allow the Christian philosophy to be taught in Atalanta both by
+speech and writing, with this one exception, that I shall not allow,
+for some time to come, the holding of assemblies in the promenades and
+open fields, but only in buildings appointed for the purpose, and,
+of course, in private dwellings. But this prohibition does not apply
+to the island unless my sister enforces it there by her own act. The
+Prince Consort of Melandria (for so will his title be henceforward
+expressed) will, I am sure, yield an implicit obedience to the one
+restriction I think good to place upon him.
+
+“The Festival of the Sun is for ever abolished. It may be that in the
+future some pageant in a Christian form may be sanctioned, but neither
+I nor he are at all desirous of doing this. I am imposing no faith upon
+Atalanta, whether old or new. I am in substantial agreement with the
+Christian religion in most parts wherein it supplements ours, and the
+Princess Mayana holds the same attitude as myself.
+
+“I think it will be for the good of the people that the new spiritual
+movement should win its way. Further, you all know that my friend
+Abercromby has asked my cousin Minya to be his wife. At this also we
+shall greatly rejoice, and for his services, which have been likewise
+great, he too shall be counted amongst the highest in the land. As for
+the three other members of the expedition, the two men who were its
+actual leaders, being eminent men of science amongst their people, are
+soon to leave us and to return to their own world, but I will send
+greeting through them to the ruler of their particular country, the
+island of Britain, telling him how much I regret that his people are,
+for the most part, so evil that I cannot permit any direct intercourse
+between them and my own subjects.
+
+“The servant of the expedition, one Jackson by name, has been cruelly
+martyred by the priests in the Temple, to my very deep regret, for
+he was a good man and fought nobly for us in the hour of the great
+rebellion. He lies beneath the bridge of Amalona, honoured amongst the
+illustrious dead. He it was who, by his wisdom and sagacity, guided
+Prince Claretson of Melandria to the place where the sacred manuscript,
+which will no doubt be added to the terrestrial Bible, was discovered,
+in the securing of which my sister and the prince had a terrible
+struggle with a wild beast.
+
+“I have no more to add, notables and friends. For the first time I
+greet you as your mother and Queen, and my chief regret this day is,
+that we are so soon to lose two whom we should have been glad to see
+always with us.”
+
+The banquet was prolonged to a very late hour. Music and song, poetry
+and recitation, were constantly recurring. There was a short patriotic
+ode, entitled “The Saluting of the Banner,” which was always sung on
+state occasions--
+
+ Wave the banner high,
+ Loyal hearts reply,
+ The throne of Atalanta shall endure;
+ Aided from above,
+ Rooted in our love,
+ What is more triumphantly secure?
+
+ In its shelter we rejoice,
+ And sing with grateful voice
+ To those whose love protects us every day;
+ Wide the scarlet banner flings
+ Its all-protecting wings,
+ O’er the happy land that owns its peaceful sway.
+
+Before the guests dispersed, little Minya, who had perhaps the sweetest
+voice in the court circle, sang one of the most touching of the
+half-romantic, half-religious lyrics of Atalanta, called “Waiting for
+the Light.”
+
+All the company rose to their feet when the first plaintive notes were
+struck.
+
+It was a song specially hated by the idolatrous party, but dear to
+the hearts of others, and now very welcome to the Royalists, both for
+religious and political reasons:--
+
+ Waiting for the light on the distant hills,
+ Whence we bade farewell to the Traveller unknown,
+ He who came to tend us and heal us of our ills,
+ Ere He took His journey, friendless and alone.
+
+ Did we understand Him in His lowly guise?
+ Did our glad hearts open to the wisdom that He taught?
+ Rather did we wonder in a dull surprise,
+ Could it be divinity these gracious marvels wrought?
+
+ We were always waiting further proof to see,
+ Closing our proud minds to the proofs already given;
+ Now we stand all friendless in our agony,
+ Waiting for a light that can only come from Heaven.
+
+ Ages now have sped since the sad and shameful day,
+ When we drove Him from us with a cold good-bye,
+ O’er Keraunea’s hills He took His weary way,
+ Leaving us to mourn and to wander till we die!
+
+ Waiting, we are turning questioning eyes to Heaven,
+ As we stand bewildered in the maze of life.
+ Shall the hour relieve us when the clouds are riven,
+ And a heavenly message end our mental strife?
+
+ We may _seem_ contented in the Flowery Land,
+ ’Neath the skies all sunlit--never draped in night--
+ Yet an aching heart tries in vain to understand
+ Why the ages leave us waiting for the light!
+
+The echoes died away amid a wailing chant which, from every part of the
+hall, rose, swelled, and faded. In deep silence each guest defiled past
+the canopied throne, inclined with a deep reverence to the Queen and
+the princesses, and then left the hall.
+
+“I could not have stood much more of that,” said the engineer. “Never
+in my life have I had such an experience as this evening. I wonder
+whether these queer people can be screwed up to put their feelings into
+real future practice?”
+
+“The dons would have felt rather funny if this had been a Gaudy,”
+remarked the Professor. “Radcliffe will have all his work well cut out.
+I should like to take a peep in here, say, ten years hence.”
+
+“Now, my prince, there is one more job in hand to-night before we
+retire to rest,” said Abercromby. “Step this way and get married,
+please.”
+
+“Martin Luther wanted one of his friends to attend that he might be
+sure that he was married after all,” answered Radcliffe. “Which is it
+with me? I never felt so bewildered in all my life. Anyway, I have got
+Melanitis.”
+
+“That is the chief thing, my noble prince. The clear air of bracing
+Melandria will set you right on all side topics. Come along, there is
+the Queen calling to you. She will be wanting to know what the dickens
+you are keeping them all waiting for.”
+
+The ceremony was of the simplest kind. They knelt before Mexitli, and
+she joined their hands together. When they rose up Abercromby said,
+“_My_ state ceremony will be a little more complicated, but then _I_
+shall be doing it for the first time. You _have_ paid all the necessary
+fees, so now you can skiddadle; there is neither bellringer, clerk, nor
+parson, except your own august self. Farewell for the present, and be
+better children than you were at Barmouth.”
+
+ * * * * *
+
+The next morning all was astir in the palace. For the last time the
+Asteroid lay fixed in position upon the terrace square. At the morning
+meal a feeling of sadness hung over the party, which not even the
+gay sallies of Abercromby could fully dispel. The Professor and the
+engineer made short speeches full of good sense and kindly expression.
+They then took a farewell of the Princess Mayana, who was compelled,
+from reasons of state business, to remain behind. All the others were
+to journey with their friends as far as they could.
+
+At ten o’clock by terrestrial time the engines were set going, and the
+Asteroid winged its aerial flight from Atalanta city. Nearly the whole
+population had gathered in the streets and promenades, and cheer after
+cheer of greeting was sent up. In order to please her departing guests,
+the Queen ordered that a somewhat different route to Melandria should
+be taken. This time they sped across in a due westerly direction, not
+veering southwards till they had got to a distance of about fifty miles
+from the city. Villas and country houses continued to approach and to
+recede beneath them, and at last, after crossing a line of hills, the
+waters of the great western ocean came in sight.
+
+The northern end of Melandria could just be observed on the distant
+horizon, and on a spur of ground that projected some way into the sea
+they caught sight of a tall building with a graceful tower, several
+hundred feet in height. At first the Professor and engineer thought it
+was a lighthouse.
+
+“Nay,” replied Mexitli, “this is a signalling station from whence, by
+flashes of light, messages are conveyed to and from the Observatory
+on Aptaura. Most usually, these messages consist of a statement of
+supplies sent to, or received by, the astronomers, but sometimes news
+of scientific interest is conveyed. If you all had but only come by
+way of the southern pole we should have heard of you at once, and then
+perhaps----”
+
+“We might not have got into so much mischief,” supplied the Professor.
+
+The Queen laughed. “I see your conscience is still sensitive,
+Carmichael.”
+
+“What are they signalling to us?” cried Minya. “Why I do believe----”
+she finished the sentence with an exclamation.
+
+“I can read the code,” said Melanitis. “Look! it runs: ‘Why not signal
+from Aptaura to Karamandra?’”
+
+“A nice suggestion,” said the Queen. “Who has made it, I wonder? Some
+one who wanted me to receive it in a roundabout way.”
+
+They held on, above the waves which were agitated by a grand swell and
+current, and soon the heights of the twilight island rose before them,
+and, an hour later, they had reached the Peak, as it was called, and
+were in the house of Andron.
+
+“Andron, this is rather hard upon you,” said Melanitis in a kindly
+tone. “I won’t tell you you are relieved of your post, for who want
+to be relieved when they love their work? I will tell you instead,
+that you are to be promoted to another and a higher post at the palace
+itself.”
+
+“I feel deeply grateful for all the kind recognition which any services
+of mine rendered to my country have already received,” said Andron;
+“and the chief thing that gives me pleasure now is to have the honour
+of inviting you and the prince to remain under my roof till the day
+when you are formally installed in my place.”
+
+The party were soon partaking of hospitality upon the lawn of the
+house, with its fine view over the southern sea, and the splendid
+crescent-shaped esplanade of houses that lined the bay.
+
+Conversation took, as before, a scientific turn, and the ex-governor of
+Melandria was directly asked by the Professor to state his views as to
+the possibility of interplanetary signalling. He told him what a stir
+had been made upon the earth by the mere rumour of a message from Mars,
+as the supposed outbreak of recent light on that planet had been called.
+
+“We know little about Mars,” answered Andron, “much less than you
+probably do, which may well be, seeing that we are more than sixty
+millions of miles from it. I see no reason to think that remote and
+snowbound planet has, at least now, any inhabitants. But it has always
+struck me that communication might some day be established between
+Atalanta and your world, which is sometimes only twenty-four millions
+of miles apart, only our planet is so awkwardly situated as regards
+yours that, when we are nearest to you, you can only see us as a thin
+extended crescent. But, as you before told me, our giant Aptaura can be
+discerned in your telescopic vision as a tiny sparkling point, due, of
+course, to the sun’s rays impinging upon its top. I have always thought
+that a signal might be conveyed to you from us, and if so, as you have
+learned our language, an alphabet could be constructed.”
+
+“Did _you_ convey a suggestion to me from Aptaura this very morning,
+Andron?” said the Queen, smiling.
+
+“Yes, he did,” replied Ayacatil; “he was afraid that if he ventured it
+too directly you would veto him at once.”
+
+“Have you really any suggestions to make?” said the Queen.
+
+“As the sun’s rays strike the peak of Aptaura with almost overwhelming
+power,” answered Andron, “I cannot see why they might not be focussed
+in a powerful reflector, and a beam shot skywards in the direction of
+Karamandra. If they can only see our signal, much will be gained. They
+might afterwards transmit one of their own from a Karamandran mountain
+peak, and, though their hills are much smaller, yet their world,
+appearing as a full circle to us, could more easily be observed by us.”
+
+“But there is something more than this matter which we have been
+considering,” said Ayacatil. “If, which God forbid, any accident should
+happen to your machine in space, the whole fruit of your researches
+would be lost. I advise that your manuscripts be sealed up in a
+fire-proof cylinder which, in a last extremity, could be thrown out,
+and it would of necessity fall into the attraction of your world.”
+
+“Admirable!” said Mexitli.
+
+“We have prepared such a contrivance,” answered Andron, “and it will
+give us much pleasure to present you with it.”
+
+The cylinder was duly inspected, and all agreed that it should be
+sealed up when they reached Aptaura.
+
+The next two days Clarence and Frank spent largely in the society of
+the friends they were so soon to lose.
+
+The Queen and Melanitis spent most of their time together, and it was
+noted by many how serenely happy the princess looked.
+
+And then came the day when the whole party stood upon the mighty
+mountain peak of Venus. They were facing the cold hemisphere of the
+south. The green-red star, the “little queen of the night,” shone upon
+them. Towards it, in a few minutes, the prow of the Asteroid would be
+turned.
+
+Mexitli held out both her hands to Carmichael and to Carysfort.
+
+“Farewell,” she said; “we met in hostility, we part in friendship. My
+best wishes for you, for your nation, for the teeming millions of the
+human races; may they learn to appreciate more and more what their
+Divine Prince and Saviour has done for them. We are infinitely the
+better for your sojourning amongst us. You broke our laws at the first
+only through ignorance, as I now gladly admit, and your conduct since
+has been irreproachable.”
+
+“May your Majesty enjoy a long and glorious reign,” said the Professor.
+“May all that the Prince of Melandria and Abercromby carry out here
+be a blessing both to them and to you. Perhaps it was our fault that
+we have not enjoyed ourselves from the first as we might have done.
+Once more I thank you for your kindness. To my dying day I shall never
+forget Atalanta.”
+
+“Good-bye, Queen,” said Carysfort. “A plain Englishman always has ten
+times more to say than he knows how to express in words.”
+
+“I understand,” replied Mexitli.
+
+“Tell the Vice-Chancellor,” said Frank, “I think I could pass if I
+went back to Cambridge now. I know Atalantan if I don’t know much more
+Greek.”
+
+“Good-bye,” said Radcliffe; “when you happen to run over to Oxford,
+just give my love to old Prebendary Seaton. I fear I did not visit in
+his parish quite as much as I should; tell him that I have a large
+parish now.”
+
+“Good-bye all,” said Melanitis. “My prayers will go with you. When
+we meet again there will be no parting.” Then she put her hand into
+Radcliffe’s.
+
+“Good-bye,” said Minya. “Tell the English ladies the names of the four
+English songs which we like best.”
+
+“Good-bye, Professor and Engineer,” said Abercromby. “I ... there, it’s
+not a bit of use, I’m stuck.”
+
+“Don’t attempt it, man,” said Carmichael as he entered the Asteroid.
+“Come along, Carysfort, it’s really time we were off. Here is the MS.
+cylinder. We won’t forget _that_. Start the engines.”
+
+
+
+
+ _POSTSCRIPT_
+
+ CHAPTER XXX
+
+ THE MYSTERY THAT WAS UNSOLVED
+
+
+I think that it only remains for us--Maurice Sheldon, Fellow of
+Trinity, and Gilbert Rice, Tutor and Lecturer of the same--to say
+briefly how we came in possession of the most amazing narrative ever
+written by man.
+
+We have put it together and carefully compiled it from the manuscripts
+of our friends--Professor Carmichael, Mr. Frank Abercromby, Mr. John
+Herbert Carysfort, and the Rev. Clarence Radcliffe, of St. Boniface
+College, Oxford, and curate of St. Dunstane, then and for some time
+under Prebendary Seaton.
+
+Mr. Rice and myself, after an unusually hard term of work, took a
+reading party to Bude, in North Cornwall. They and we had a very
+enjoyable time in a comfortable farmhouse on the cliffs, a mile out
+of Bude, in a quiet country district called Upper Lynstone. After the
+junior members of our party had dispersed, I suggested that a walking
+tour would make a capital wind-up to a very happy vacation.
+
+We struck camp, therefore, went down the coast to Boscastle and
+Tintagel, where we explored the wonderfully interesting neighbourhood,
+and then we trained from Camelford to Wadebridge. We were to make
+Newquay our objective point, and we started at about two o’clock from
+our hotel at Wadebridge, having had our luggage sent on to the Headland
+Hotel at Newquay.
+
+The afternoon was far from propitious, and when we got out upon St.
+Breock’s downs, a mile distant from Wadebridge, we thought a heavy
+thunderstorm was coming on, and we sheltered for a time at a toll-house
+placed at a fork of the roads. We decided, after all, to push on,
+and, when we had reached a most desolate stretch of moorland, we were
+appalled by a sudden blaze of light from a murky mass of clouds, which
+was instantly followed, not by a peal of thunder, but by a resounding
+concussion, which made the very road heave under our feet, and nearly
+overturned us both into a ditch.
+
+When we recovered our senses, we saw that a huge aerolite had fallen
+upon the moor close by, only a hundred yards from the road. It had
+split in two, and the fragments lay rent asunder and sending up vapour
+and steam. But our attention was instantly riveted by a conical
+cylinder of greyish-coloured metal still partly attached to the smaller
+of the two fragments.
+
+The thing was so evidently of artificial make, and had so plainly
+fallen, in connection with the aerolite, from the sky, that we were
+hardly able to control ourselves for excitement and agitation. Perhaps
+I was the more impulsive of the two, for I made several foolish
+attempts to secure the strange object, but only burned the skin of my
+hands in doing so.
+
+Several occupants of farms lying within a mile of the shock came
+running up in due course. We explained what had happened, and
+prevailed, by the persuasive argument of a coin, on one of the
+sturdiest of them, to procure a vehicle from the nearest available
+place, which, unfortunately for us, was as far off as St. Columb
+Major. However, before assistance arrived, the cylinder had cooled
+sufficiently to enable us to hoist it into the vehicle and to drive
+away with it to the little roadside hotel at St. Columb, where we sat
+up all night. With a hammer and chisel we managed to break the thing
+open, and a roll of manuscripts tumbled out.
+
+We felt like men on the brink of a great discovery, and so truly
+we were; for the manuscripts were nothing more nor less than the
+astounding narratives which we have here pieced together and present to
+the public.
+
+The letters which our friends had despatched from Newbiggin, in
+Northumberland, had been published in the Press, and had caused a
+sensational flutter at the time. But few had given full credence to
+the story, and some had even set it down as a hoax. At the same time,
+the utter disappearance of four persons well known at Cambridge and
+at Oxford was a thing in itself that needed accounting for. Whatever
+explanation was then given, it remains to be seen what attitude the
+public in general, and the scientific public in particular, will now
+adopt when they read and study the foregoing narrative. Whether men are
+convinced or no, it is our duty to clear up all mysteries which so very
+personally affect our friends, and this we have now done by letting
+them speak for themselves.
+
+There is no hope whatever that we shall ever see them again, and there
+are only two theories to be entertained of the fate of Professor
+Carmichael and the engineer and of the two peculiar persons who had the
+misfortune to be compelled to be their fellow-travellers.
+
+One is, that they came to grief in space. If that be so, there can, I
+fear, be little doubt how it happened. They could not have fallen into
+the sun, as they once so much dreaded, because if so the cylinder would
+have perished with them. Rather do we believe they were struck in the
+void of space (probably not far from the earth) by a meteorite, which
+wrecked the machine by the shock of direct collision.
+
+The two bodies would then be fused together into one burning mass, and
+would fall upon the earth by virtue of the terrestrial attraction. The
+only explanation we can give as to how the cylinder could have escaped
+is, that, in the last moment of agony and suspense, Carmichael must
+have thrown it out into space; then, after the collision, it would
+naturally fall upon the huge meteorite as the nearest attracting body
+and be carried along with it.
+
+One other theory presents itself: that the catastrophe happened nearer
+to Venus, that the Asteroid was not fatally damaged, that the cylinder
+was cast adrift, and that the travellers, after an awful struggle with
+death, returned to Venus, and are now living in it as their adopted
+country.
+
+One very curious circumstance has been noted from an Italian
+Observatory. Professor Rossini and his two assistants were attentively
+watching Venus early on the morning of a day of exceptionally fine
+weather in August. They noticed tiny sparklets of light emitted from
+the summit of the high mountain on the southern horn of the crescent.
+These lights continued flashing for nearly a quarter of an hour, and it
+is at least a remarkable coincidence that the number of flashes, which
+were carefully counted by Professor Rossini, exactly correspond to the
+letters in the names of Carmichael and Carysfort.
+
+Can we dare to deduce any theory of hope from this? The planet has been
+kept under close observation, but nothing has been noted since.
+
+ (Signed) MAURICE SHELDON.
+ GILBERT RICE.
+
+
+
+
+ BRIGHTON
+ H. AND C. TREACHER
+ PRINTERS
+
+
+
+
+Transcriber’s note:
+
+
+ Obvious errors in punctuation have been silently corrected in this
+ version, but minor inconsistencies and archaic forms have been
+ retained as printed. Typos in proper names have been silently
+ corrected. The footnote has been slightly moved to better fit the
+ ebook format.
+ New original cover art included with this eBook is granted to the
+ public domain.
+
+ The following alterations have been made:
+
+ On page 052: umanity _to_ humanity
+
+ “I will go about in a bath-chair if it is to benefit humanity,” said
+ Abercromby.
+
+
+ On page 088: eludicate _to_ elucidate
+
+ The Professor admitted that this was quite possible, but it did not
+ elucidate the amazing problem of how English could be known in Venus.
+
+
+ On page 165: eyerywhere _to_ everywhere
+
+ And as for you, strangers, go forth and spread everywhere the things
+ which God has done for your world,
+
+
+ On page 174: hought _to_ I thought
+
+ “Pardon the liberty I am taking, but I thought you would like to know
+ how we are all doing.
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 79051 ***